NEC Projector lcd projector User Manual

LCD Projector  
NP3250/NP2250/NP1250  
NP3250W  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important Information  
Safety Cautions  
Precautions  
Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W projector and keep the  
manual handy for future reference.Your serial number is located on the bottom of your projector. Record it here:  
CAUTION  
To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet.  
The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily  
accessible.  
CAUTION  
TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET.  
THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE.  
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufficient to cause electrical  
shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit.  
This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this  
unit has been provided.  
The information should be read carefully to avoid problems.  
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
DO NOT USE THIS UNIT’S PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE  
PRONGS CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.  
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)  
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.  
Acoustic Noise Information Ordinance-3. GSGV (for Germany only):  
The sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 3744 or ISO 7779.  
Laser Caution  
This label is on the side of the remote control.  
This mark is on the top of the remote control.  
CAUTION  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may re-  
sult in hazardous radiation exposure.  
CAUTION  
Do not look into the laser pointer while it is on and do not point the laser beam at a person. Serious in-  
jury could result.  
CAUTION  
Avoid displaying stationary images for a prolonged period of time.  
Doing so can result in these images being temporarily sustained on the surface of the LCD panel.  
If this should happen, continue to use your projector. The static background from previous images will  
disappear.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important Information  
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:  
Handling the cables supplied with this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of Califor-  
nia to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.  
Disposing of your used product  
EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical and electronic  
products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately from normal household waste. This in-  
cludes projectors and their electrical accessories or lamps. When you dispose of such products, please  
follow the guidance of your local authority and/or ask the shop where you purchased the product.  
After collecting the used products, they are reused and recycled in a proper way. This effort will help us  
reduce the wastes as well as the negative impact such as mercury contained in a lamp to the human  
health and the environment at the minimum level.  
The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European Union Member  
States.  
RF Interference (for USA only)  
WARNING  
The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT  
those specified by NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government  
regulation could void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,  
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will  
not occur in a particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.  
For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with molded plug has a Black (five Amps) fuse installed for use with  
this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.  
Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market  
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important Information  
Important Safeguards  
These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent fire and shock. Please read  
them carefully and heed all warnings.  
Installation  
• Do not place the projector in the following conditions:  
- on an unstable cart, stand, or table.  
- near water, baths or damp rooms.  
- in direct sunlight, near heaters or heat radiating appliances.  
- in a dusty, smoky or steamy environment.  
- on a sheet of paper or cloth, rugs or carpets.  
• If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:  
- Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.  
- The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the  
risk of bodily injury.  
- In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accor-  
dance with any local building codes.  
- Please consult your dealer for more information.  
WARNING  
• Do not cover the lens with the lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to melting of  
the cap due to the heat emitted from the light output.  
• Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens. Doing so could lead  
to the object melting from the heat that is emitted from the light output.  
Place the projector in a horizontal position  
The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other  
than the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.  
10°  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important Information  
Fire and Shock Precautions  
• Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside  
your projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10cm) of space between your projector and a wall.  
• Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the left front (when seen from the front) as it can become heated while  
the projector is turned on.  
• Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector. Do not attempt to re-  
trieve any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as a wire or screwdriver  
into your projector. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately and have the object re-  
moved by a qualified service personnel.  
• Do not place any objects on top of the projector.  
• Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or fire.  
• The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power supply  
fits this requirement before attempting to use your projector.  
• Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result.  
• Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of a projector exhaust vent.  
Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the ex-  
haust.  
• Handle the power cable carefully. A damaged or frayed power cable can cause electric shock or fire.  
- Do not use any power cables than the supplied one.  
- Do not bend or tug the power cable excessively.  
- Do not place the power cable under the projector, or any heavy object.  
- Do not cover the power cable with other soft materials such as rugs.  
- Do not heat the power cable.  
- Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.  
Turn off the projector, unplug the power cable and have the projector serviced by a qualified service personnel  
under the following conditions:  
- When the power cable or plug is damaged or frayed.  
- If liquid has been spilled into the projector, or if it has been exposed to rain or water.  
- If the projector does not operate normally when you follow the instructions described in this user’s manual.  
- If the projector has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.  
- If the projector exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.  
• Disconnect the power cable and any other cables before carrying the projector  
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable before cleaning the cabinet or replacing the lamp.  
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable if the projector is not to be used for an extended period of time.  
• When using a LAN cable:  
For safety, do not connect to the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important Information  
CAUTION  
Always carry your projector by the carrying handle. Before doing so, be sure to lock the carrying handle in place.  
To lock the carrying handle, see “To lock the carrying handle” on page 6.  
• Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry  
or hang (from the wall or ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector.  
• Do not send the projector in a soft case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector inside the  
soft case could be damaged.  
• Select [HIGH] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select  
[SETUP]  
[OPTIONS]  
[FAN MODE]  
[HIGH].)  
• Before using Direct Power Off, be sure to allow at least 20 minutes immediately after turning on the projector  
and starting to display an image.  
• Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet or projector when the projector is powered on. Doing so can  
cause damage to the AC IN connector of the projector and (or) the prong plug of the power cable.  
To turn off the AC power supply when the projector is powered on, use a power strip equipped with a switch  
and a breaker.  
• Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the left front (when seen from the front) as it can become heated  
while the projector is turned on and immediately after the projector is turned off.  
• Do not turn off the AC power for 60 seconds after the lamp is turned on and while the POWER indicator is  
blinking green. Doing so could cause premature lamp failure.  
Caution on Handling the Optional Lens  
When shipping the projector with the optional lens, remove the optional lens before shipping the projector. The lens  
and the lens shift mechanism may encounter damage caused by improper handling during transportation.  
Do not hold the lens part when carrying the projector.  
Doing so could cause the focus ring to rotate, resulting in accidental dropping of the projector.  
Remote Control Precautions  
Handle the remote control carefully.  
If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.  
Avoid excessive heat and humidity.  
Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fire.  
If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.  
Ensure that you have the batteries’ polarity (+/−) aligned correctly.  
Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of batteries together.  
Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.  
Note for US Residents  
The lamp in this product contains mercury. Prease dispose according to Local, State or Federal Laws.  
Lamp Replacement  
To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page 136.  
Be sure to replace the lamp when the message [THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE LIFE.  
PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP.] appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end  
of its usable life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch  
them as the pieces of glass may cause injury.  
If this happens, contact your dealer for lamp replacement.  
A Lamp Characteristic  
The projector has a high-pressure mercury lamp as a light source.  
A lamp has a characteristic that its brightness gradually decreases with age. Also repeatedly turning the lamp on  
and off will increase the possibility of its lower brightness.  
CAUTION:  
When removing the lamp from a ceiling-mounted projector, make sure that no one is under the projector. Glass  
fragments could fall if the lamp has been burned out.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important Information  
About High Altitude mode  
Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1600 me-  
ters or higher.  
Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTI-  
TUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple  
minutes and turn on the projector.  
Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE]  
can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO].  
Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters or higher can shorten the life of optical  
components such as the lamp.  
About Copyright of original projected pictures:  
Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or the attraction of public attention in a ven-  
ue such as a coffee shop or hotel and employing compression or expansion of the screen image with the following  
functions may raise concern about the infringement of copyrights which are protected by copyright law.  
[ASPECT RATIO], [KEYSTONE], Magnifying feature and other similar features.  
USB Wireless LAN Unit  
Cautions on Usage  
Warning  
The USB Wireless LAN Unit is not meant for use with facilities or equipment involving the safeguard of hu-  
man life, such as medical equipment, nuclear facilities or equipment, aeronautical or space equipment, trans-  
portation facilities or equipment, etc., or with facilities or equipment requiring high levels of reliability. Do not  
use the USB Wireless LAN Unit in such cases.  
Do not use the USB Wireless LAN Unit near cardiac pacemakers.  
Do not use the USB Wireless LAN Unit near medical equipment. Doing so may cause electromagnetic inter-  
ference with the medical equipment, possible leading to death.  
Do not disassemble or modify the USB Wireless LAN Unit in any way. Doing so could lead to fire or electric  
shock.  
Do not use the USB Wireless LAN Unit in wet or moist places, such as in bathrooms or near humidifiers. Do-  
ing so could lead to fire, electric shock or malfunction.  
Caution  
To prevent damage due to static electricity, eliminate any static electricity from your body before touching the  
USB Wireless LAN Unit.  
Static electricity from the human body may damage the USB Wireless LAN Unit. Before touching the USB  
Wireless LAN Unit, touch an aluminum sash, a door knob, or some other metal object around you to elimi-  
nate the static electricity.  
Caution  
The radio waves used by the USB Wireless LAN Unit pass through the wood or glass used in normal homes (but  
not through window panes with built-in metallic mesh).  
The radio waves do not pass through iron reinforcing bars, metal or concrete, however, so the USB Wireless LAN  
Unit cannot be used for communicating through walls or floors made with these materials.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important Information  
FCC Compliance  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this  
device may not cause harmful interference and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B Personal Computer and Peripher-  
al, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harm-  
ful interference in a residential installation.  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-  
dance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
This equipment has been tested to comply with the limits for a Class B personal computer and peripheral, pursu-  
ant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. Only peripherals (computer input/output devices, terminals, printers, etc.)  
certified (DoC) or verified to comply with Class B limits may be attached to this equipment. Operation with non-  
certified (DoC) or non-verified personal computer and/or peripherals is likely to result in Interference to radio and TV  
reception.  
The connection of a unshielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC Certification of  
this device and may cause interference levels which Exceed the limits established by FCC for equipment.  
You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance  
could void your authority to operate the equipment.  
Regulatory Information/Disclaimers  
Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in strict accordance with the instructions included in the  
user documentation provided with the product. Any changes or modifications (including the antennas) made to this  
device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of  
this device, or the substitution of the connecting cables and equipment other than manufacturer specified. It is the  
responsibility of the user to correct any interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or at-  
tachment. Manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors will assume no liability for any damage or viola-  
tion of government regulations arising from failing to comply with these guidelines.  
CAUTION  
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, the antenna used for this transmitter must be in-  
stalled to provide a separation distance of at least 7.87"/20cm from all persons and must not be co-located or  
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  
SAR compliance has been established in typical laptop computer(s) with USB slot, and product could be used in  
typical laptop computer with USB slot. Other application like handheld PC or similar device has not been verified  
and may not compliance with related RF exposure rule and such use shall be prohibited.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important Information  
Usage restrictions in North America  
The following channels can be used indoors only.  
In the United States and Canada: 36, 40, 44, and 48 channels  
In Mexico: 149, 153, 157, 161, and 165 channels  
The other channels can be used both indoors and outdoors.  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian RSS-210.  
Cet appareil numerique de la Classe B est conforme a la norme CNR-210 du Canada.  
To comply with Canada RSS-210(Issue 7) section A9.4(b)(ii); this radio product will not transmit on any channels  
operating in the exclusion band of 5600 - 5650MHz. All channels in the 5600 - 5650MHz band will be disabled by  
factory firmware and is not user changeable.  
Regulatory Statement:  
Operation of this device is subjected to the following National regulations and may be prohibited to use if certain re-  
striction should be applied.  
France:  
Outdoor use limited to 10mW e.i.r.p. within the band 2454 – 2483.5 MHz. Derogation in French overseas depart-  
ments of Guyane and La Reunion: outdoor use not allowed in band 2400 - 2420 MHz.  
Hereby, NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. declares that this USB Wireless LAN Unit (Model: NP01LM) is in compliance  
with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.  
Cautions on security when using wireless LAN products  
With a wireless LAN, radio waves are used instead of LAN cables for the exchange of data between the wireless  
access points (computers, etc.), offering the advantage that LAN connections can be made freely within the range  
of the radio waves.  
On the other hand, the radio waves reach all points within this range, regardless of walls or other obstacles, possi-  
bly resulting in the problems described below if the proper security measures are not taken.  
Contents of transmissions may be intercepted  
Malicious third parties may purposely intercept the radio waves and steal information contained in the transmis-  
sions, including such personal information as ID numbers, passwords, credit card numbers, e-mail messages,  
etc.  
Improper intrusions  
Malicious third parties may without permission access the personal or company network and steal personal or  
confidential information, pretend to be someone else and leak incorrect information, rewrite information that has  
been intercepted, introduce computer viruses or otherwise damage data or the system, etc.  
Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points generally include security measures for dealing with these prob-  
lems. Making the proper security settings before using the products can reduce the risk of such problems arising.  
We recommend that you fully understand the problems that can arise when using the products without making the  
security settings, then that you make the security settings based on your own decision and at your own discretion.  
Operation of the USB Wireless LAN Unit is subjected to the regulations of the countries listed below, and may be  
prohibited to use outside the country where you purchased. If you need to use the projector outside the country  
where you purchased, you must remove the USB Wireless LAN Unit from the projector before exporting.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Introduction  
What’s in the Box?  
Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer.  
Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your Projector.  
P
O
W
E
R
R
O
E
FF  
S
W
U
O
P
T
A
P
T
S
M
A
B
L
Y
B
S
U
D
V
N
ID  
C
A
T
E
S
/
N
O
O Y  
C
O
S-V  
E
1
M
P
C
R
U
ID  
U
T
O
O
S
E
M
O
E
R
T
P
P
O
S
O
U
J
N
E
D
2
W
E
A
O
N
O
T
T
R
U
N
A
M
R
O
F
E
3
R
V
IE  
D
3
W
ER  
N
ET  
W
O
R
K
S
E
T
L
E
C
E
L
C
T
E
P
S
U
N
W
O
D
L
A
L
S
E
-
C
R
L
I
C
K
E
T
H
P
I
G
I
R
P
M
O
U
S
R
-
F
E
C
R
L
A
I
C
T
F
S
E
E
P
Z
K
L
E
E
C
T
L
A
M
V
P
O
M
O
L
U
D
M
E
E
A
U
M
TO  
A
G
A
N
D
J.  
I
F
Y
P
A
G
PICTURE  
E
E
U
P
P
I
D
O
C
-
W
M
N
U
T
3
D
R
E
F
O
R
M
HELP  
Remote control  
(7N900801)  
Batteries (AA × 2)  
Projector  
Lens cap  
(24FT9741)  
Remote Cable  
(7N520019)  
Power cable  
(For North America:  
7N080204)  
VGA signal cable  
(7N520052)  
(For Europe and other  
countries: 7N080011)  
CD-ROM  
User’s manual (7N951321) and  
User Supportware 6 (7N951311)  
• Important Infomation (For North America:  
7N8P9481) (For Other countries than North  
America: 7N8P9481 and 7N8P9491)  
• Quick Setup Guide (7N8P9471)  
• Wired and Wireless Network Setup Guide  
(7N8P9501)  
• Security sticker  
(24L67991)  
• Anti-theft screw for lens × 1  
(24V00841)  
For North America only  
Registration card  
Limited warranty  
Installed USB wireless LAN unit  
North America: NP01LM3  
Europe: NP01LM2  
Joint module  
For customers in Europe:  
You will find our current valid Guarantee  
Policy on our Web Site:  
www.nec-display-solutions.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Introduction  
Introduction to the Projector  
This section introduces you to the NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W projector and describes key features and  
controls.  
Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector  
The NP3250/NP2250/NP1250 is a sophisticated XGA projector that produces an enhanced display. NP3250W is a  
WXGA projector. With the NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W you will be able to project images up to 500" (mea-  
sured diagonally). Enjoy crisp and sharp large screen display from your PC, workstation or Macintosh computer,  
DVD player, VCR, satellite hookup, HDTV source, as well as images from your USB storage device. The NP3250/  
NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W provides for enhanced security options to help deter projector theft and provides for full  
projector control through the PC control port (D-Sub 9 Pin) and LAN support. With input and output flexibility, long  
lamp life and a full function remote, the NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W lets you enjoy larger than life viewing  
from a compact and easy to setup and use projector.  
Features you’ll enjoy :  
LCD projector with high resolution and high brightness  
High resolution display - up to UXGA compatible, XGA native resolution.  
WXGA ꢀꢁ80 × 800 native resolution (NP3ꢁ50W only)  
The NP3250W with WXGA (1280 × 800) native resolution was designed with the future in mind by supporting  
emerging wide screen resolutions being used in more of today’s computers and SD signals along with the ever  
increasing demands for HD signals.  
Extensive optional lens  
One standard lens and five types of optional lenses are available  
Lens shift mechanism offers installation flexibility  
Manual lens shift that can be adjusted by turning dials on the top of the projector  
Direct Power Off  
The projector has a feature called “Direct Power Off”. This feature allows the projector to be turned off (even  
when projecting an image) by using the Main Power Switch or disconnecting the AC power supply.  
To turn off the AC power supply when the projector is powered on, use a power strip equipped with a switch and  
a breaker.  
NOTE: Before using Direct Power Off, be sure to allow at least 20 minutes immediately after turning on the projector and  
starting to display an image.  
Auto Power On, and Auto Power Off functions  
The AUTO POWER ON(AC), AUTO POWER ON(COMP1/2), AUTO POWER OFF, and OFF TIMER features  
eliminate the need to always use the POWER button on the remote control or projector cabinet.  
Integrated RJ-45 connector for wired networking capability along with wireless networking capabilities  
An RJ-45 connector and a USB Wireless LAN unit are equipped as standard features*.  
Present from anywhere in the room when using as a wireless LAN projector and software contained on the sup-  
plied User Supportware 6 CD-ROM, no physical signal cable connection to a PC is required.  
NOTE: The NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W series projectors distributed in some areas and countries do not come stan-  
dard with the USB Wireless LAN Unit.  
If you purchase the projector without the USB Wireless LAN Unit installed and need to present to the projector via a wireless  
connection, the optional USB Wireless LAN Unit must be installed.  
Windows Vista standard functions Network Projector and Remote Desktop can be used  
A Windows Vista-based computer can be operated using the projector over a network.  
The projector supports the Network Projector function and the Remote Desktop function of Windows Vista.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Introduction  
A variety of input ports and a comprehensive array of system control interfaces  
This projector supports input signals on the following ports: BNC, DVI-D, 15pin D-Sub, component, composite  
and S-video.  
Wall Color Correction  
Built-in Wall Color Correction presets provide for adaptive color correction when projecting onto non-white  
screen material (or a wall).  
IDT HQV technology produces superior video processing  
The technology produces superior video processing using pixel-based, motion-adaptive de-interlacing to remove  
undesirable motion artifacts typical of interlaced signals.  
Seven picture preset modes for user adjustable picture and color settings  
Each picture preset mode can be customized and memorized according to your preference.  
Preventing unauthorized use of the projector  
Enhanced smart security settings for password protection, cabinet control panel lock, and USB memory protec-  
tion key to help prevent unauthorized access, adjustments and theft deterrence.  
The optional remote control (NP0ꢁRC) allows you to assign a CONTROL ID to the projector  
Multiple projectors can be operated separately and independently with the same single remote control by as-  
signing an ID number to each projector.  
Viewer function supports LAN  
Image or movie files stored in a shared folder or on a media server can be projected using the Viewer function  
via the LAN.  
The Viewer supports the “media sharing” function in Windows Media Player 11.  
About this user’s manual  
The fastest way to get started is to take your time and do everything right the first time. Take a few minutes now to  
review the user’s manual. This may save you time later on. At the beginning of each section of the manual you’ll find  
an overview. If the section doesn’t apply, you can skip it.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Introduction  
Part Names of the Projector  
Front/Top  
Lens Shift Dial (Right / Left, Up / Down)  
(
page 27)  
Controls  
(
page 7)  
R
E
W
U S  
T
P O  
A
P
T
S
M
A
L
Y
B
B
S
Focus Ring  
U
D
N
A
T
S /  
N
O
E
C
R
U
O
S
T
S
U
J
D
A
O
T
U
A
(
page 28)  
M
R
O
F
E
R
D
3
T
C
E
L
E
S
U P  
N
W
O
D
Remote Sensor  
Ventilation (inlet) / Filter  
(
page 10)  
T
R I G H  
(
page 134)  
Built-in Security Slot ( )*  
Ventilation (inlet) / Filter  
S
S H I F T  
L E N  
L E F T  
LENS RELEASE Button  
(
page 142)  
Lens  
(
page 134)  
Zoom Lever  
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever  
(
page 28)  
(
page 29)  
Lens Cap  
Adjustable Tilt Foot  
(
page 29)  
*
This security slot supports the MicroSaver® Security System. MicroSaver® is a registered trademark of Kens-  
ington Microware Inc. The logo is trademarked and owned by Kensington Microware Inc.  
Rear  
L
L
E
E
F
N
S
T
S
H
IF  
T
RIGH  
T
Stereo Speaker (5W × 2)  
DO  
W
N
U
P
SELECT  
USB Wireless LAN unit  
The model without the USB  
wireless LAN unit has a dummy  
cover here.  
3D  
R
E
FO  
R
M
AU  
T
O
ADJU  
S
T
SOURC
ON  
/S  
T
AN  
D
U
SB  
B
L
A
Y
M
S
P
T
AT  
PO  
U
S
W
E
R
W
I
R
E
L
E
S
S
S
S
E
L
E
R
I
W
Ventilation (outlet)  
Heated air is exhausted from  
here.  
Lamp Cover  
(
page 136)  
Terminal Panel  
(
page 8)  
Remote Sensor  
(
page 10)  
Main Power Switch  
When you plug the supplied power cable into an active  
wall outlet and turn on the Main Power switch, the POW-  
AC Input  
Connect the supplied power cable’s three-pin plug here,  
and plug the other end into an active wall outlet.  
ER indicator turns orange and the projector is in standby  
mode.  
(
page 22)  
(
page 23)  
NOTE:  
The USB Wireless LAN Unit emits weak radio waves when the projector is in standby mode or turned on.  
If you use the projector with the USB Wireless LAN Unit in the area where the use of wireless LAN equipment is prohibited, dis-  
able the wireless function. ( page 114)  
* To stop emitting radio waves from the USB Wireless LAN Unit, select [NETWORK SETTINGS]  
[WIRELESS]  
[PROFILES]  
[DISABLE].  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Introduction  
Bottom  
Anti-theft Screw for Lens  
Carrying Handle  
(
page 143)  
Carrying the Projector  
Always carry your projector by the handle.  
Ensure that the power cable and any other cables connecting to video sources are disconnected before moving the  
projector.  
When moving the projector or when it is not in use, cover the lens with the lens cap.  
NOTE: To stand the projector on its end, do so by holding the cabinet, not by holding the carrying handle.  
Doing so can cause damage to the carrying handle.  
Lock  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Introduction  
To lock the carrying handle  
1. Carefully place the projector on its end.  
2. Pull up the carrying handle with the catch pressed down.  
3. Press down the left and right locks to set the carrying handle  
in place.  
To place back the carrying handle, press up the left and right  
locks and pull down the carrying handle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Introduction  
Top Features  
9
10  
8
7
6
1 4 5  
SELECT  
USB  
LAMP  
STATUS  
POWER  
3D.REFORM AUTO.ADJUST SOURCE  
ON/STAND.BY  
11  
12  
3 2  
ꢀ. POWER Button (  
ꢁ3, 34)  
) (ON / STAND BY) ( page  
ꢂ. SOURCE Button  
ꢃ. AUTO ADJUST Button ( page 3ꢁ)  
NOTE: To turn on the projector, press and hold this button  
for a minimum of two seconds. To turn off the projector,  
press this button twice.  
8. 3D REFORM Button ( page 30, 40)  
9. MENU Button  
ꢁ. POWER Indicator ( page ꢁ3, 34, ꢀ44)  
ꢀ0. SELECT  
/ Volume Buttons  
  
3. STATUS Indicator ( page ꢀ44)  
ꢀꢀ. ENTER Button  
ꢀꢁ. EXIT Button  
4. LAMP Indicator ( page ꢀ3ꢂ, ꢀ44)  
5. USB Indicator  
Lights when a USB memory is inserted into the USB  
port.  
NOTE: The USB indicator will not light when non-USB stor-  
age devices such as USB mouse devices are inserted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Introduction  
Terminal Panel Features  
4 13 12  
3
2
USB(LAN)  
14  
5 6  
7
1
8
9 11 10  
The actual appearance of the terminal panel may differ slightly from that shown in the drawing, but this does not af-  
fect the projector’s performance.  
ꢀ. COMPUTER ꢀ IN/Component Connector (Mini  
ꢀ0. PC CONTROL Port (D-Sub 9 Pin) ( page ꢀ58, ꢀ59)  
D-Sub ꢀ5 Pin) ( page ꢀ4, ꢀꢂ)  
Use this port to connect your PC or control system  
to control your projector via a serial cable. This  
enables you to control the projector using serial  
communication protocol. A commercially available  
RS232C cross cable is required to use this port.You  
can also control the projector by using PC Control  
Utility 3.0 contained on the supplied User Support-  
ware 6 CD-ROM. To do so you must first have PC  
Control Utility 3.0 installed on your PC. If you are  
writing your own program, typical PC control codes  
are on page 158.  
AUDIO IN (Stereo Mini Jack) ( page ꢀ4, ꢀ5, ꢀꢃ)  
ꢁ. COMPUTER ꢁ IN/Component (R/Cr, G/Y, B/Cb, H,  
V) Connectors (BNC × 5) ( page ꢀ4)  
AUDIO IN (Stereo Mini Jack) ( page ꢀ4)  
3. COMPUTER 3 (DVI-D) IN Connector (ꢁ4 Pin)  
(HDCP compatible) ( page ꢀ5)  
AUDIO IN (Stereo Mini Jack) ( page ꢀ5)  
4. COMPONENT IN (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr) Connectors  
(RCA) ( page ꢀꢃ)  
AUDIO L/MONO, R (RCA) ( page ꢀꢃ)  
ꢀꢀ. Remote Jack (Stereo Mini Jack) ( page ꢀꢀ)  
NOTE:  
5. S-VIDEO IN Connector (Mini DIN 4 Pin) ( page  
• Connecting the remote cable to the REMOTE mini jack  
on the terminal panel will make the wireless operation  
unavailable.  
ꢀ8)  
ꢂ. VIDEO IN Connector (RCA) ( page ꢀ8)  
ꢀꢁ. USB Port (Type A) ( page 3ꢃ)  
ꢃ. VIDEO/S-VIDEO AUDIO L/MONO, R (RCA) ( page  
ꢀ8)  
ꢀ3. LAN Port (RJ-45) ( page ꢀ9, ꢀꢀ0)  
8. MONITOR OUT Connector (Mini D-Sub ꢀ5 Pin)  
ꢀ4. USB Wireless LAN unit ( page ꢀꢂ0)  
(
page ꢀꢂ)  
NOTE: A dummy cover is provided on this location of the  
projector which does not come standard with the USB  
Wireless LAN Unit.  
9. AUDIO OUT (Stereo Mini Jack) ( page ꢀꢂ)  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Introduction  
Part Names of the Remote Control  
4. LED  
T
C
E
L
E
S
Flashes when any button is pressed.  
N E T W O R K  
3
5. POWER ON Button ( page ꢁ3)  
V I E W E R  
2
P O N E N T  
C O M  
O N  
R
E
S - V I D E O  
1
W
NOTE: To turn on the projector, press and hold the POWER  
ON button for a minimum of two seconds.  
O
P
C O M P U T E R  
V I D E O  
F
O F  
R
E
W
O
P
3
1
ꢂ. POWER OFF Button ( page 34)  
NOTE: To turn off the projector, press the POWER OFF but-  
ton twice.  
2
ꢃ. COMPUTER ꢀ Button ( page ꢁ5)  
ꢀ. Laser Pointer  
8. COMPUTER ꢁ Button ( page ꢁ5)  
9. COMPUTER 3 Button ( page ꢁ5)  
CAUTION:  
* Do not look into the laser pointer while it is on.  
* Do not point the laser beam at a person.  
ꢀ0. VIDEO Button ( page ꢁ5)  
ꢀꢀ. S-VIDEO Button ( page ꢁ5)  
ꢁ. Infrared Transmitter  
ꢀꢁ. COMPONENT Button ( page ꢁ5)  
3. Remote jack ( page ꢀꢀ)  
ꢀ3. VIEWER Button ( page ꢁ5, ꢂ5)  
ꢀ4. NETWORK Button ( page ꢁ5)  
4
5
ꢀ5. MENU Button  
7
POWER  
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
ꢀꢂ. SELECT  
Button  
  
COMPUTER  
6
10  
11  
1
2
VIEWER  
VIDEO  
8
ꢀꢃ. ENTER Button  
ꢀ8. EXIT Button  
COMPONENT  
13  
3
S-VIDEO  
NETWORK  
14  
ꢀ9. LASER Button ( page 33)  
12  
9
ꢁ0. MOUSE R-CLICK Button ( page 39)  
15  
SELECT  
ꢁꢀ. MOUSE L-CLICK Button ( page 39)  
16  
17  
ꢁꢁ. FREEZE Button ( page 35)  
18  
19  
ꢁ3. PIP Button ( page 43)  
LASER  
ꢁ4. ASPECT Button ( page 93)  
L-CLICK  
R-CLICK  
21  
22  
23  
ꢁ5. VOLUME +/− Buttons ( page 3ꢁ)  
MOUSE  
FREEZE  
20  
29  
30  
PIP  
ꢁꢂ. PICTURE Button ( page 88, 90)  
ASPECT LAMP MODE AUTO ADJ.  
ꢁꢃ. PIC-MUTE Button ( page 35)  
24  
VOLUME MAGNIFY  
PAGE  
UP  
ꢁ8. MAGNIFY +/− Buttons ( page 35)  
31  
25  
DOWN  
ꢁ9. LAMP MODE Button ( page 3ꢂ)  
PICTURE  
PIC-MUTE  
3D REFORM  
32  
33  
26  
27  
30. AUTO ADJ. Button ( page 3ꢁ)  
HELP  
3ꢀ. PAGE UP/DOWN Buttons ( page 39)  
3ꢁ. 3D REFORM Button ( page 30, 40)  
33. HELP Button ( page 3ꢂ)  
28  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Introduction  
Battery Installation  
Press the catch and re-  
Install new ones (AA). Ensure  
3
Slip the cover back over the bat-  
teries until it snaps into place.  
move the battery cover.  
that you have the batteries’ po-  
larity (+/−) aligned correctly.  
NOTE: Do not mix different types of  
batteries or new and old batteries.  
2
2
1
1
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control  
7 m/22 feet  
7 m/22 feet  
30°  
30°  
30°  
30°  
Remote control  
Remote sensor on projector cabinet  
30°  
Remote control  
30°  
30°  
30°  
7 m/22 feet  
7 m/22 feet  
NOTE: Actual operating range may differ slightly from that shown in the drawing.  
TIP: You can determine which remote sensor on the projector is enabled in wireless mode. The options are: front, rear or both. (  
page 124)  
The infrared signal operates by line-of-sight up to a distance of about 22 feet/7 m and within a 60-degree angle  
of the remote sensor on the projector cabinet.  
The projector will not respond if there are objects between the remote control and the sensor, or if strong light  
falls on the sensor.  
Weak batteries will also prevent the remote control from properly operating the projector.  
ꢀ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1. Introduction  
Remote Control Precautions  
Handle the remote control carefully.  
If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.  
Avoid excessive heat and humidity.  
Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fire.  
If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.  
Ensure that you have the batteries’ polarity (+/−) aligned correctly.  
Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of batteries together.  
Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.  
Using the Remote Control in Wired Operation  
Connect one end of the supplied remote cable to the REMOTE mini jack and the other end to the remote jack on  
the remote control.  
When in wired operation, the remote control can operate the projector without having to install batteries.  
NOTE:  
• Connecting the remote cable to the REMOTE mini jack on the terminal panel will make the wireless operation unavailable.  
REMOTE  
USB(LAN)  
ꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Installation and Connections  
This section describes how to set up your projector and how to connect PCs, video and audio sources.  
Your projector is simple to set up and use.  
But before you get started, you must first:  
z
x
Set up a screen and the projector.  
Connect your computer or video equip-  
ment to the projector. See pages 14 -  
21.  
c
Connect the supplied power cable.  
See page 22.  
3
NOTE: Ensure that the power cable and any  
other cables are disconnected before moving the  
projector. When moving the projector or when it  
is not in use, cover the lens with the lens cap.  
Setting Up the Screen and the Projector  
Selecting a Location [NP3250/NP2250/NP1250]  
The further your projector is from the screen or wall, the larger the image. The minimum size the image can be is  
approximately 30 inches (0.76 m) measured diagonally when the projector is roughly 41 inches (1.0 m) from the  
wall or screen. The largest the image can be is 500 inches (12.7 m) when the projector is about 718 inches (18.2 m)  
from the wall or screen. Use the drawing below as a guide.  
Screen Size (unit: cm/inch)  
609.6 (W) X 457.2 (H) / 240 (W) X 180 (H)  
300  
Screen Size  
"
487.7 (W) X 365.8 (H) / 192 (W) X 144 (H)  
406.4 (W) X 304.8 (H) / 160 (W) X 120 (H)  
240  
"
200  
"
304.8 (W) X 228.6 (H) / 120 (W) X 90 (H)  
243.8 (W) X 182.9 (H) / 96 (W) X 72 (H)  
150  
"
120  
"
203.2 (W) X 152.4 (H) / 80 (W) X 60 (H)  
162.6 (W) X 122.0 (H) / 64 (W) X 48 (H)  
100  
"
80"  
60"  
40"  
121.9 (W) X 91.4 (H) / 48 (W) X 36 (H)  
81.3 (W) X 61.0 (H) / 32 (W) X 24 (H)  
Lens center  
L
E
F
T
L
E
N
S
S
H
I
 T
R
I
H
T
DOWN  
U
P
10.9/429.1"  
m/inch)  
SELEC  
T
3D.RE  
FORM  
8.7/342.5"  
AUTO  
.ADJU  
ST  
SOUR  
CE  
ON/S  
T
AND  
.BY  
USB  
AMP  
T
U
S
POW  
S
E
T
A
L
R
   I
7.3/287.4"  
5.4/212.6"  
4.3/169.3"  
3.6/141.7"  
   L
   S
   S
   L
       R
1.4/  
55.12"  
14.2"  
2.9/1  
2.1/82.68"  
Distance (Unit:  
TIP: The screen sizes above are intermediate values between tele (minimum display area) and wide (maximum display area) when  
the standard lens is used. Image size can be adjusted with the zoom adjustment up to a maximum of 15%.  
For optional lenses, see page 139.  
ꢀꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Installation and Connections  
Selecting a Location [NP3250W]  
The further your projector is from the screen or wall, the larger the image. The minimum size the image can be is  
approximately 30 inches (0.76 m) measured diagonally when the projector is roughly 44 inches (1.1 m) from the  
wall or screen. The largest the image can be is 500 inches (12.7 m) when the projector is about 756 inches (19.2 m)  
from the wall or screen. Use the drawing below as a guide.  
Screen Size (unit: cm/inch)  
646.2 (W) X 403.9 (H) / 254 (W) X 159 (H)  
300  
Screen Size  
"
516.9 (W) X 323.1 (H) / 204 (W) X 127 (H)  
430.8 (W) X 269.2 (H) / 170 (W) X 106 (H)  
240  
"
200  
"
323.1 (W) X 201.9 (H) / 127 (W) X 79 (H)  
258.5 (W) X 161.5 (H) / 102 (W) X 64 (H)  
150  
"
120  
"
215.4 (W) X 134.6 (H) / 85 (W) X 53 (H)  
172.3 (W) X 107.7 (H) / 68 (W) X 42 (H)  
100  
"
80"  
60"  
40"  
129.2 (W) X 80.8 (H) / 51 (W) X 32 (H)  
86.2 (W) X 53.8 (H) / 34 (W) X 21 (H)  
Lens center  
L
E
F
T
L
E
N
S
S
H
I
 T
R
I
H
T
DOWN  
U
P
11.5/452.5"  
m/inch)  
SELEC  
T
3D.RE  
FORM  
9.2/361.5"  
7.6/301"  
AO  
A
S
SOUR  
CE  
ON/S  
T
AND  
.BY  
USB  
AMP  
T
U
S
POW  
S
E
T
A
L
R
   I
   L
S
   S
   L
       R
1.5/  
58.5"  
5.7/225"  
4.6/179.5"  
2.3/89"  
3.0/119"  
3.8/149.5"  
Distance (Unit:  
TIP: The screen sizes above are intermediate values between tele (minimum display area) and wide (maximum display area) when  
the standard lens is used. Image size can be adjusted with the zoom adjustment up to a maximum of 15%.  
For optional lenses, see page 140.  
ꢀ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Installation and Connections  
Making Connections  
Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer  
NOTE: When using with a notebook PC, be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode  
and before turning on the power to the notebook PC.  
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up.  
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-saver or power manage-  
ment software.  
Enabling the computer’s external display  
Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector.  
When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.  
Usually, the combination of the “Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on  
or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle through  
external display selections.  
COMPUTER 2 IN  
NOTE: Both COMPUTER 1 IN and  
COMPUTER 3 (DVI-D) IN connectors  
USB(LAN)  
support Plug & Play (DDC2B).  
COMPUTER 1 IN  
BNC × 5 cable (not supplied)  
Audio  
cable (not  
Audio cable (not supplied)  
VGA signal cable (supplied)  
supplied)  
To mini D-Sub 15-pin connector on the  
projector. It is recommended that you use  
a commercially available distribution am-  
plifier if connecting a signal cable longer  
than the one supplied.  
PHONE  
NOTE: For older Macintosh, use a commercially  
available pin adapter (not supplied) to connect to  
your Mac’s video port.  
IBM VGA or Compatibles (Notebook  
type) or Macintosh (Notebook type)  
First turn off the computer and the projector before making connections.  
Turn down the volume on the computer before connecting an audio cable to the headphone jack of the com-  
puter. After connecting the computer to the projector, you can adjust the sound level on the computer and the  
projector to your preference.  
You are recommended to connect an audio cable to an audio out connector (mini jack type) if any.  
NOTE: The NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W is not compatible with video decoded outputs of either the NEC ISS-6020 and  
ISS-6010 switchers.  
NOTE: An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back via a commercially available scan converter.  
This is because the projector will process a video signal as a computer signal at the default setting. In that case, do the following.  
* When an image is displayed with the lower and upper black portion of the screen or a dark image is not displayed correctly:  
Project an image to fill the screen and then press the AUTO ADJ button on the remote control or the AUTO ADJUST button on  
the projector cabinet.  
ꢀ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Installation and Connections  
When Viewing a DVI Digital Signal  
To project a DVI digital signal, be sure to connect the PC and the projector using a DVI-D signal cable (not supplied)  
before turning on your PC or projector. Turn on the projector first and select COMPUTER 3 from the source menu  
before turning on your PC.  
Failure to do so may not activate the digital output of the graphics card resulting in no picture being displayed.  
Should this happen, restart your PC.  
Do not disconnect the DVI-D signal cable while the projector is running. If the signal cable has been disconnected  
and then re-connected, an image may not be correctly displayed. Should this happen, restart your PC.  
NOTE:  
• Use a DVI-D cable compliant with DDWG (Digital Display Working Group) DVI (Digital Visual Interface) revision 1.0 standard.  
The DVI-D cable should be within 5 m (197") long.  
• The DVI (DIGITAL) connector (COMPUTER 3 (DVI-D) IN) accepts VGA (640 × 480), SVGA (800 × 600), 1152 × 864, XGA  
(1024 × 768), SXGA (1280 × 1024 @ up to 60Hz), SXGA+ (1400 × 1050 @ up to 60Hz), WXGA (1280 × 768, 1280 × 800), and  
WXGA+ (1440 × 900 @ up to 60Hz).  
(DVI-D connector with HDCP)  
COMPUTER 3 (DVI-D) IN  
AUDIO IN  
USB(LAN)  
Audio cable (not supplied)  
DVI-D cable  
(not supplied)  
PHONE  
IBM VGA or Compatibles or Macintosh  
What is HDCP/HDCP technology?  
HDCP is an acronym for High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. High bandwidth Digital Content Protection  
(HDCP) is a system for preventing illegal copying of video data sent over a Digital Visual Interface (DVI).  
If you are unable to view material via the DVI input, this does not necessarily mean the projector is not functioning  
properly. With the implementation of HDCP, there may be cases in which certain content is protected with HDCP  
and might not be displayed due to the decision/intention of the HDCP community (Digital Content Protection, LLC).  
ꢀ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Installation and Connections  
Connecting an External Monitor  
COMPUTER 1 IN (or COMPUTER 2 IN / COMPONENT IN)  
USB(LAN)  
AUDIO OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
Audio cable (not supplied)  
Audio cable (not supplied)  
VGA signal cable (supplied)  
VGA signal cable (not supplied)  
AUDIO  
IN  
PHONE  
You can connect a separate, external monitor to your projector to simultaneously view on a monitor the RGB ana-  
log or component image you’re projecting.  
NOTE:  
• Daisy chain connection is not possible.  
• The MONITOR OUT connector will output no video signal (Digital signal) from the COMPUTER 3 (DVI-D) IN connector.  
• When audio equipment is connected, the projector speaker is disabled.  
• When the projector is in standby condition, the MONITOR OUT connector outputs the last displayed video signal and the AU-  
DIO OUT jack outputs the last audio signal. The sound level remains at the previous level set for the last input used.  
ꢀꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Installation and Connections  
Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output  
USB(LAN)  
COMPONENT IN  
AUDIO IN  
Component video RCA × 3  
cable (not supplied)  
Audio Equipment  
DVD player  
L
R
Y
Cb Cr  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO OUT  
Component  
L
R
Audio cable (not supplied)  
TIP: A component signal will be automatically displayed. If not, from the menu, select [SETUP]  
[OPTIONS]  
[SIGNAL SE-  
LECT] [COMPUTER 1 (or 2)] [COMPONENT].  
When connecting to the COMPUTER 2 IN, use a commercially available RCA (female)-to-BNC(male) adapter.  
NOTE: Refer to your DVD player’s owner’s manual for more information about your DVD player’s video output requirements.  
ꢀꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Installation and Connections  
Connecting Your VCR  
USB(LAN)  
S-VIDEO IN  
VIDEO IN  
AUDIO IN  
S-Video cable (not supplied)  
Video cable (not supplied)  
Audio equipment  
VCR  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
L
R
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO OUT  
L
R
Audio cable (not supplied)  
NOTE: Refer to your VCR owner’s manual for more information about your equipment’s video output requirements.  
NOTE: An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind via  
a scan converter.  
ꢀ8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Installation and Connections  
Connecting to a Network  
The NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W comes standard with a LAN port (RJ-45) which provides a LAN connec-  
tion using a LAN cable. The USB Wireless LAN Unit also provides a wireless LAN connection. To use a LAN con-  
nection, you are required to assign an IP address to the projector. For setting the NETWORK, see page 110. (From  
the menu, select [SETUP]  
[INSTALLATION(2)]  
[NETWORK SETTINGS])  
NOTE: Some projectors may not have the USB Wireless LAN Unit. If you own a projector without the USB Wireless LAN Unit in-  
stalled and need to present to the projector via a wireless connection, the optional USB Wireless LAN Unit must be installed.  
With the LAN connection, two features are available: Projector control and Picture transmission.  
Projector control feature  
With the wired or wireless LAN connection, you can control (power on/off, input select, etc.) and receive information  
from the projector over the network using a computer. The following three methods are available:  
* Using the HTTP Server feature on the projector. ( page 53)  
* Using PC Control Utility 3.0 from the supplied User Supportware 6 CD-ROM.  
* Using Image Express Utility 2.0 from the supplied User Supportware 6 CD-ROM.  
Picture transmission feature (Using WindowsVista)  
A Windows Vista-based computer can be operated using the projector over a network. The projector supports the  
Network Projector function and the Remote Desktop function of Windows Vista. ( page 56, 60)  
Picture transmission feature (Using User Supportware ꢂ CD-ROM)  
With the wired or wireless LAN connection, you can send images and slides from a personal computer to the pro-  
jector which then can be projected on the screen. The following two methods are available:  
* Using Image Express Utility 2.0 from the supplied User Supportware 6 CD-ROM.  
* Using ArcSoft MediaImpression from the supplied User Supportware 6 CD-ROM.  
With the USB mouse connected to the projector, you can also operate the desktop screen on your Windows PC  
connected to the LAN or the wireless LAN.  
* Using Desktop Control Utility 1.0 from the supplied User Supportware 6 CD-ROM.  
TIP: Five Windows software programs (Image Express Utility 2.0, Desktop Control Utility 1.0, ArcSoft MediaImpression, Viewer  
PPT Converter and PC Control Utility 3.0) and a Macintosh software program (Image Express Utility 2 for Mac OS X) are con-  
tained on the supplied Projector User Supportware 6 CD-ROM. For their functions and operations, see the user’s guides (PDF)  
contained on the same CD-ROM.  
For the procedure to connect the projector with the network (wireless LAN/wired LAN), refer to “Wired and  
Wireless Network Setup Guide” attached.  
For the procedure to connect Windows Vista with the network (wireless LAN/wired LAN), refer to the manual  
of Windows Vista.  
Viewer function supporting network  
* Using the Viewer function, image and movie files stored in a shared folder in a computer connected to a net-  
work can be projected. ( page 73)  
* The Viewer supports the “Media Sharing” function in Windows Media Player 11. ( page 77)  
NOTE: A LAN card on your computer must be compatible with Wi-Fi (IEEE802.11a/b/g) standard.  
ꢀ9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Installation and Connections  
Example of LAN connection  
(A) Example of wired LAN connection  
Server  
Hub  
LAN cable (not supplied)  
NOTE: Use a Category 5 or higher LAN cable.  
LAN  
USB(LAN)  
(B) Example of wireless LAN connection  
(Network Type  
Infrastructure)  
PC with wireless  
LAN card inserted  
PC with built-in wireless  
LAN function  
USB Wireless LAN Unit  
Wireless access point  
Wired LAN  
To make connection with a wireless LAN via a wireless access point, you need to select the Infrastructure mode.  
From the menu, select [SETUP]  
[INSTALLATION(2)]  
[NETWORK SETTINGS]  
[WIRELESS]  
[AD-  
VANCED]  
[CONNECTION]  
[NETWORK TYPE]  
[INFRASTRUCTURE].  
ꢁ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Installation and Connections  
(C) Example of wireless LAN connection (Network Type  
Ad Hoc)  
USB Wireless LAN Unit  
PC with wireless  
LAN card inserted  
PC with built-in wireless  
LAN function  
To enable direct communication (i.e., peer-to-peer) between personal computers and projectors, you need to  
select the Ad Hoc mode.  
From the menu, select [SETUP]  
[INSTALLATION(2)]  
[NETWORK SETTINGS]  
[WIRELESS]  
[AD-  
VANCED]  
[CONNECTION]  
[NETWORK TYPE]  
[AD HOC].  
The Ad Hoc mode complies with IEEE802.11 standard.  
ꢁꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Installation and Connections  
Connecting the Supplied Power Cable  
Connect the supplied power cable to the projector.  
First connect the supplied power cable’s three-pin plug to the AC IN of the projector, and then connect the other  
plug of the supplied power cable in the wall outlet.  
LEF  
L
T
L
L
EN  
S
E
F
E
N
T
S
S
S
H
HIF  
T
I
F
T
R
I
G
H
T
D
O
W
N
U
P
S
E
L
E
C
T
3
D
REFOR
AUTO ADJ
SOU  
RCE  
O
N
/
S
T
A
N
USB  
P
D
B
LAM  
STATUS  
POWER  
Y
WRILES  
S
WRILES  
To wall outlet  
Make sure that the prongs are fully  
inserted into both the AC IN and the  
wall outlet.  
About Direct Power Off  
The projector has a feature called “Direct Power Off”. This feature allows the projector to be turned off (even when  
projecting an image) using the Main Power Switch or disconnecting the AC power supply.  
NOTE: Before using Direct Power Off, be sure to allow at least 20 minutes immediately after turning on the projector and starting  
to display an image.  
CAUTION:  
Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the left front (when seen from the front) as it can become heated  
while the projector is turned on and immediately after the projector is turned off.  
CAUTION:  
Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet or projector when the projector is powered on. Doing so can  
cause damage to the AC IN connector of the projector and (or) the prong plug of the power cable.  
NOTE: To turn off the AC power supply when the projector is powered on, use a power strip equipped with a switch and a breaker.  
ꢁꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)  
This section describes how to turn on the projector and to project a picture onto the screen.  
Turning on the Projector  
NOTE:  
• The projector has two power switches: a main power switch and a POWER (ON/STAND BY) button (POWER ON and OFF on the  
remote control).  
• When plugging in or unplugging the supplied power cable, make sure that the main power switch is pushed to the off () po-  
sition. Failure to do so may cause damage to the projector.  
• The projector has a feature to prevent itself from being used by unauthorized individuals. To use this feature, register a key-  
word. ( page 45)  
1. Remove the lens cap.  
L
L
L
L
E
E
E
E
N
F
F
N
T
T
S
S
S
S
H
H
IF  
I
F
T
T
R
R
IGIG  
H
H
T
T
DD  
O
W
N
U
U
Do not try to remove the lens cap by pulling on the  
string. Doing so can cause damage.  
P
P
S
E
L
E
C
T
3D  
R
EF  
O
R
M
AU  
TO  
AD  
USB  
JU  
S
T
S
O
U
RC  
E
O
N
/S  
T
A
N
U
SB  
D
B
L
A
Y
M
S
P
T
A
P
T
U
O
S
W
E
R
W
I
R
E
LAMP  
L
E
S
S
S
S
E
L
E
R
I
W
2. To turn on the main power to the projector, press the  
Main Power switch to the on position ( I ).  
STATUS  
POWER  
The projector will go into standby mode. When in stand-  
by mode, the POWER indicator will light orange and the  
STATUS indicator will light green.  
3. After making sure that the projector is in standby  
mode, press the POWER (ON/STAND BY) or POWER  
(ON) button for a minimum of 2 seconds when the  
STATUS indicator goes off and the POWER indicator  
starts blinking.  
POWER  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
COMPUTER  
1
2
VIER  
VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
3
S-VIDEO  
N
USB  
LAMP  
STATUS  
POWER  
3D.REFORM AUTO.ADJUST SOURCE  
ON/SND.BY  
SELECT  
When the POWER indicator turns a steady green,  
and the projector is ready to use.  
After you turn on your projector, ensure that the comput-  
er or video source is turned on and that your lens cap is  
removed.  
Standby  
Blinking  
Power On  
LAMP  
LAMP  
LAMP  
STATUS  
POWER  
STATUS  
POWER  
STATUS  
POWER  
ON/SND BY  
Steady green /  
orange light  
Blinking green Steady green  
light light  
Press this button for a  
minimum of 2 seconds.  
(
page 144)  
NOTE: When no signal is available, a blue, black or logo screen is displayed.  
ꢁ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)  
Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)  
When you first turn on the projector, you will get the Startup menu. This menu gives you the opportunity to select  
one of the 21 menu languages.  
To select a menu language, follow these steps:  
1. Use the SELECT button to select one of the 21 lan-  
guages for the menu.  
POWER  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
COMPUTER  
1
2
VIEWER  
VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
3
S-VIDEO  
NETWORK  
SELECT  
3D REFORM AUTO ADJUST SOURCE  
SELECT  
POWER  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
COMPUTER  
1
2
VIEWER  
VIDEO  
2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection.  
COMPONENT  
3
S-VIDEO  
NETWORK  
SELECT  
After this has been done, you can proceed to the menu  
operation.  
SELECT  
3D REFORM AUTO ADJUST SOURCE  
If you want, you can select the menu language later. (  
[LANGUAGE] on page 105)  
NOTE:  
• The projector cannot be turned off for 60 seconds after the lamp is turned on and while the POWER indicator is blinking green.  
• If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off or when the ambient temperature is high, the cooling fans  
will run for a moment and then you will get an image on the screen.  
• Immediately after turning on the projector, screen flicker may occur. This is normal. Wait 3 to 5 minutes until the lamp lighting  
is stabilized.  
When the [LAMP MODE] is set to [ECO], the Lamp indicator will light green.  
If one of the following things happens, the projector will not turn on.  
-
If the internal temperature of the projector is too high, the projector detects abnormal high temperature. In this  
condition the projector will not turn on to protect the internal system. If this happens, wait for the projector’s  
internal components to cool down.  
-
-
When the lamp reaches its end of usable life, the projector will not turn on. If this happens, replace the lamp.  
(
page 136)  
If the lamp fails to light, and if the STATUS indicator flashes on and off in a cycle of six times, wait a full minute  
and then turn on the power.  
NOTE: Turning the Main Power Switch Off then Back On  
Allow a minimum of one second between turning off the main power switch and turning it back on again.  
The same will be applied when a power strip equipped with a switch and a breaker is used.  
Failing to do so could result in no power to the projector. (There will be no stand-by LED)  
Should this happen, unplug the power cable and plug it in again. Turn on the main power switch.  
ꢁ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)  
Selecting a Source  
Selecting the computer or video source  
Selecting from Source List  
Press and quickly release the SOURCE button on the projector cabinet to dis-  
play the Source list. Each time the SOURCE button is pressed, the input source  
will change as follows: “COMPUTER 1/2/3”, “COMPONENT”, “VIDEO” (VCR),  
“S-VIDEO”, “VIEWER” (slides on a USB memory) or “NETWORK” (LAN port  
[RJ-45] or installed USB wireless LAN unit).  
SELECT  
USB  
LAMP  
STATUS  
POWER  
3D REFORM AUTO ADJUST SOUE  
ON/STAND BY  
To display the selected source, press the ENTER button.  
Detecting the Signal Automatically  
Press and hold the SOURCE button for a minimum of 1 second, the projector  
will search for the next available input source. Each time you press and hold the  
SOURCE button for a minimum of 1 second, the input source will change as fol-  
lows:  
SELECT  
USB  
LAMP  
STATUS  
POWER  
3D REFORM AUTO ADJUST SOUE  
ON/STAND BY  
COMPUTER1  
COMPUTER2  
COMPUTER3  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO VIEWER  
COMPUTER1  
...  
If no input signal is present, the input will be skipped. When the input source  
you wish to project is displayed, release the button.  
POWER  
POWER  
ON  
Using the Remote Control  
Press any one of the COMPUTER 1/2/3, COMPONENT, VIDEO, S-VIDEO,  
VIEWER or NETWORK buttons.  
OFF  
COMPUTER  
1
2
VIEWER  
VIDEO  
COMPONT  
3
S-VIDEO  
NETWORK  
SELECT  
ꢁ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)  
Adjusting the Picture Size and Position  
Use the lens shift dials, the adjustable tilt foot levers, the zoom lever or the focus ring to adjust the picture size and  
position.  
Adjusting the position of a projected image  
[Lens shift]  
Adjusting the focus  
[Focus ring]  
LE  
FT  
LE  
NS  
SH  
IFT  
LE  
FT  
LE  
NS  
SH  
IFT  
R
IG  
HT  
RI  
GH  
T
DO  
WN  
DO  
WN  
UP  
UP  
LE  
CT  
SE  
LE  
CT  
3D  
RE  
FO  
R
3D  
RE  
A
TO  
FO  
RM  
A
DJ  
AU  
S  
TO  
AD  
S
OU  
JU  
S
RC  
E
SO  
UR  
O
N/S  
CE  
TA  
ND  
US  
B
ON  
B
Y
L
AM  
P
/S  
TA  
S
TAT  
US  
ND  
US  
BY  
LA  
ST  
AT  
US  
B
POW  
ER  
MP  
PO  
W
WIRLES  
ER  
WIRLES  
S
S
S
WRILES  
WIRLES  
(
page 27)  
Adjusting the throw angle (the height of an image)  
[Tilt foot] *¹  
Finely adjusting the size of an image  
[Zoom lever]  
LE  
FT  
LE  
NS  
LE  
FT  
LE  
NS  
SH  
IFT  
SH  
IFT  
RI  
RI  
GH  
GH  
T
T
DO  
DO  
WN  
WN  
UP  
UP  
SE  
LE  
SE  
LE  
CT  
CT  
3D  
3D  
RE  
RE  
FO  
FO  
RM  
RM  
AU  
AU  
TO  
TO  
AD  
AD  
JU  
JU  
ST  
SO  
SO  
UR  
UR  
CE  
CE  
ON  
ON  
/S  
/S  
TA  
TA  
ND  
D  
US  
US  
LA  
B
ST  
AT  
U
S
BY  
LA  
ST  
AT  
US  
B
BY  
MP  
MP  
PO  
PO  
W
W
ER  
ER  
W
WIRLES  
S
S
      S
WIRLES  
Adjusting the left and right tilt of an image  
[Tilt foot]  
Adjusting the keystone correction  
[Keystone] *²  
LE  
FT  
LE  
NS  
LE  
FT  
LE  
NS  
SH  
IFT  
SH  
IF  
T
RI  
RI  
G
GH  
T
HT  
DO  
DO  
W
WN  
N
UP  
UP  
SE  
SE  
LE  
LE  
CT  
CT  
3D  
3D  
RE  
R
EFO  
FO  
RM  
R
M
AU  
TO  
O  
AD  
AD  
JU  
JU  
S
ST  
SO  
SO  
U
RCE  
UR  
CE  
ON  
O
N/S  
/S  
TA  
TA  
N
D  
US  
US  
LA  
B
ST  
AT  
U
S
B
D
BY  
LA  
BY  
MP  
M
P
ST  
AT  
US  
PO  
PO  
W
W
ER  
ER  
W
WIRLES  
S
W
WIRLES  
NOTE*1: Adjust the throw angle (the height of an image) when the image position is higher than the lens shift adjustable range.  
NOTE*2: See “  
Correcting Keystone Distortion” on page 30 for Keystone.  
* In the above drawings, cables are omitted for clarity.  
ꢁꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)  
Adjusting the position of a projected image  
Rotate the lens shift dial.  
LENS SHIFT  
LEFT  
RIGHT  
DOWN  
UP  
LE  
LE  
NS  
FT  
SH  
IF  
T
RI  
G
HT  
DO  
W
N
UP  
SE  
LE  
CT  
3D  
R
EF  
O
R
M
AU  
TO  
AD  
JU  
ST  
SO  
U
R
CE  
O
N/  
S
T
A
ND  
US  
B
B
LA  
Y
M
ST  
P
A
T
US  
PO  
W
ER  
W
I
E
L
E
S
S
S
S
E
L
E
 R
W
NOTE: The lens shift dial for LEFT-RIGHT cannot be rotated one-half turn or more.  
Do not over rotate it or it may break.  
NOTE: Shifting the lens to the maximum in two directions combined will cause the edges of the image to become dark or will  
cause some shadows.  
TIP: The lens shift dial for UP-DOWN can be rotated one turn or more, but not beyond the adjustable range defined below.  
NOTE: Lens shift is not available with the NP01FL optional lens. The NP01FL should be used only for “zero degree” applica-  
tions.  
Desktop front projection  
Normal projection  
1V  
Position  
Vertical shift  
Max. 0.5V 0.5V  
0.1H  
1H  
0.1H  
Width of projected image  
Ceiling front projection  
Vertical shift  
Shift to left  
Shift to right  
Max.  
0.5V  
1V  
ꢁꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)  
Adjusting the focus (Focus ring)  
Rotate the focus ring to make focus adjustment.  
Focus ring  
LENS RELEASE  
LE  
LE  
NS  
FT  
SH  
IF  
T
RI  
G
HT  
DO  
W
N
UP  
SE  
LE  
CT  
3D  
R
EF  
O
R
M
AU  
TO  
AD  
JU  
ST  
SO  
U
R
CE  
O
N
/S  
TA  
US  
B
B
LA  
M
Y
ST  
P
AT  
PO  
US  
W
ER  
W
I
E
L
E
S
S
S
S
E
L
E
 R
W
Finely adjusting the size of an image (Zoom lever)  
Rotate the zoom lever to adjust the image size on the screen.  
Zoom lever  
LENS RELEASE  
LE  
LE  
FT  
NS  
SH  
IF  
T
RI  
G
HT  
DO  
W
N
UP  
SE  
LE  
CT  
3D  
R
EF  
O
R
M
AU  
TO  
A
D
JU  
ST  
SO  
U
R
C
O
N
/ST  
A
U
N
S
D
B
B
LA  
M
Y
ST  
P
AT  
PO  
US  
W
ER  
W
I
E
L
E
S
S
S
S
E
L
E
 R
W
ꢁ8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)  
Adjusting the Tilt Foot  
1. Lift the front edge of the projector.  
R
E
S
W
U
O
P
T
A
P
T
S
M
A
B
L
S
Y
B
U
D
N
A
T
S /  
N
O
CAUTION:  
E
C
R
U
O
S
T
S
U
J
D
A
O
T
U
A
M
R
O
F
E
R
D
3
Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet during Tilt Foot adjustment  
as it can become heated while the projector is turned on and during  
its cool down period after it is turned off.  
T
C
E
L
E
P
S
U
1
N
W
O
D
T
H
G
I
R
S
T
F
I
H
S
N
T
F
E
L
E
L
2
2. Push up the Adjustable Tilt Foot Levers on the right and left sides  
of the projector to extend the adjustable tilt feet (maximum height).  
Adjustable Tilt  
Foot Lever  
2
3. Lower the front of the projector to the desired height.  
Adjustable Tilt Foot  
Adjustable Tilt  
Foot Lever  
4. Release the Adjustable Tilt Foot lever to lock the Adjustable tilt foot.  
There is approximately 10 degrees (up) of adjustment for the front of  
the projector.  
R
E
S
U
W
T
O
P
A
P
T
S
M
A
B
L
S
Y
B
U
.
D
N
A
T
S /  
N
O
E
C
R
U
O
S
T
S
U
J
D
A
.
O
T
U
A
M
R
O
F
E
R
.
D
3
TIP: For operating the [KEYSTONE] screen, see “Correcting Keystone Dis-  
T
C
E
L
P
E
S
U
N
W
O
D
tortion” on page 30.  
3
T
H
G
I
R
S
T
F
I
H
S
N
T
F
E
L
E
L
4
NOTE: Your “Keystone” correction data can be reset by pressing and holding  
the 3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds.  
CAUTION:  
Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended.  
Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or hang (from the wall or  
ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector.  
4
ꢁ9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)  
Correcting Keystone Distortion  
When the projector is not exactly perpendicular to the screen, keystone distortion occurs. To overcome it, you can use the  
“Keystone” function, a digital technology that can adjust for keystone-type distortion, resulting in a crisp, square image.  
The following procedure explains how to use the [KEYSTONE] screen from the menu to correct trapezoidal distortions.  
When the projector is placed diagonally to the screen,  
When the projector is set up at an angle in relation to the screen, adjust the Horizontal option of the Keystone menu  
so that the top and bottom of sides of the projected image are parallel.  
1. Press the 3D REFORM button on the remote control or the projec-  
tor cabinet.  
The Keystone screen will be displayed on the screen.  
Projected area  
Screen frame  
2. Press the SELECT button to select [VERTICAL] and then use the  
SELECT or so that the left and right sides of the projected im-  
age are parallel.  
* Adjust the vertical keystone distortion.  
3. Align the left (or right) side of the screen with the left (or right) side  
of the projected image.  
Use the shorter side of the projected image as the base.  
In the right example, use the left side as the base.  
Align left side  
4. Press the SELECT button to select [HORIZONTAL] and then use  
the SELECT  
or  
so that the top and bottom sides of the pro-  
jected image are parallel.  
Adjust the horizontal keystone distortion.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)  
5. Repeat steps 2 and 4 to correct keystone distortion.  
6. After completing Keystone correction, press the EXIT button.  
The Keystone screen will disappear.  
To perform Keystone correction again, press the 3D REFORM button  
to display the Keystone screen and repeat above steps 1 to 6.  
NOTE:  
• If the projection angle is the same as in the last use, the previous correction setting values are retained in the memory.  
• When doing Step 2, adjust the position of image so that the screen is smaller than the area of the projected area.  
• To reset the 3D Reform correction setting values, press and hold the 3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds.  
• Each time the 3D REFORM button is pressed, the item will change as follows: KEYSTONE  
CORNERSTONE  
None  
KEY-  
STONE ...  
For information on [CORNERSTONE], see “Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion (Cornerstone)” on page 40.  
• The Cornerstone adjustment will not be available during the Keystone adjustment. To perform the Cornerstone adjustment,  
press and hold the 3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds to reset the Keystone correction setting values. The Key-  
stone adjustment will not be available during the Cornerstone adjustment. To perform the Keystone adjustment, press and hold  
the 3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds to reset the Cornerstone correction setting values.  
• The 3D Reform feature can cause an image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically.  
3ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)  
Optimizing an RGB Image Automatically  
Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust  
Optimizing an RGB image automatically.  
Press the AUTO ADJUST button to optimize an RGB image automatically.  
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time.  
[Poor picture]  
LASER  
L-CLICK  
PIP  
R-CLICK  
MOUSE  
FREEZE  
ASPECT LAMP MODE AUTO ADJ.  
SELECT  
VOLUME MAGNIFY  
PA
U
3D REFORM AUTO AUST SOURCE  
[Normal picture]  
PICTURE  
PIC-MUTE  
3D REFORM  
HELP  
NOTE:  
• Some signals may take time to display or may not be displayed correctly.  
• The Auto Adjust function does not work for component, video signals.  
• If the Auto Adjust operation cannot optimize the RGB signal, try to adjust Clock and Phase manually. ( page 91)  
Adjusting Volume Up & Down  
SELECT  
Sound level from the speaker and the AUDIO OUT  
jack (Stereo mini) on the projector can be adjusted.  
USB  
LAMP  
STATUS  
POWER  
3D REFORM AUTO ADJUST SOURCE  
ON/STAND BY  
Another way to adjust volume is to use the menu.  
Select [ADJUST]  
the menu.  
[AUDIO]  
[VOLUME] from  
NOTE:  
• Volume control is not available with the SELECT   
or button when an image is enlarged by using the  
MAGNIFY (+) button or when the menu is displayed.  
LASER  
L-CLICK  
R-CLICK  
MOUSE  
FREEZE  
PIP  
ASPECT LAMP MODE AUTO ADJ.  
Increase volume  
Decrease volume  
VOLUME MAGNIFY  
PAGE  
UP  
DOWN  
PICTURE  
P
3D REFORM  
HELP  
3ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)  
Using the Laser Pointer  
You can use the laser to draw your audience’s attention to a red dot that you can place on any object.  
CAUTION:  
• Do not look into the laser pointer while it is on.  
• Do not point the laser beam at a person.  
• Do not allow children to use the laser pointer.  
Press and hold the LASER button to activate the laser pointer.  
LE  
FT  
LE  
NS  
SH  
IFT  
RIG  
HT  
DO  
WN  
UP  
SE  
LE  
CT  
3D  
.RE  
FOR  
M
AU  
TO  
.AD  
J
SO  
UR  
CE  
ON  
/ST  
AN  
D.B  
U
SB  
Y
LA  
MP  
AT  
ST  
WE US  
PO  
R
W
I
E
L
E
S
S
S
S
E
L
E
 R
W
LA  
SE  
R
L
A
S
E
R
Setting the function switch  
There are two switches on the bottom of the battery case: an applicable projector selector switch (1) and laser en-  
able/disable switch (2). Check the projector being used and decide whether to enable or disable laser, then set  
these switches as necessary using the tip of a thin ball-point pen. On this model, an applicable projector selector  
switch (1) is not used.  
OFF  
ON  
Switch (2)  
ON.......................... Enabled.(the.laser.lights.when.the.LASER.button.is.pressed).[Factory.default]  
OFF......................... Disabled.(the.laser.does.not.light.even.when.the.LASER.button.is.pressed)  
Disable the laser when using in an environment in which the unit is accessible to children.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)  
Turning off the Projector  
To turn off the projector:  
POWER  
POWER  
1. Press the POWER (ON/STAND BY) button on the projector  
cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote control.  
The [POWER OFF / AREYOU SURE?] message will appear.  
ON  
OFF  
COMPUTER  
1
2
VIEWER  
VIO  
PONENT  
3
NETWORK  
USB  
LAMP  
STATUS  
POWER  
SELECT  
3D.REFORM AUTO.ADJUST SOURCE  
ON/SND.BY  
2. Press the ENTER button  
POWER  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
After the projector turns off, the cooling fans keep operating for  
a while (Cooling-off time).  
COMPUTER  
1
2
VIEWER  
VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
3
S-VIDEO  
NETWORK  
The cooling fans stop operating when the projector turns off  
and goes into standby mode.  
When in standby mode, the POWER indicator will light orange  
and the STATUS indicator will light green.  
USB  
LAMP  
STATUS  
POWER  
SELECT  
3D.REFORM AUTO.ADJUST SOURCE  
ON/SND.BY  
3. After making sure that the projector is in standby mode, turn  
off the Main Power switch.The power indicator will go out.  
About Direct Power Off  
The projector has a feature called “Direct Power Off”. This fea-  
ture allows the projector to be turned off (even when projecting  
an image) using the Main Power Switch or disconnecting the  
AC power supply.  
L
E
L
L
E
E
E
F
N
N
S
F
T
T
S
S
H
S
H
I
IFFT  
T
R
RI  
IG  
G
H
HT  
T
D
D
O
O
W
W
N
N
U
U
P
P
S
E
L
E
C
T
3D  
RE  
F
O
R
M
A
U
T
O
A
D
J
U
S
T
S
O
UR  
C
E
O
N
/S  
T
A
N
U
SB  
D
B
L
A
Y
M
S
P
T
A
P
T
U
O
S
W
E
R
W
I
R
NOTE: Before using Direct Power Off, be sure to allow at least 20 min-  
utes immediately after turning on the projector and starting to display  
an image.  
E
L
E
S
S
S
S
E
L
E
R
I
W
CAUTION  
Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet or projec-  
tor when the projector is powered on. Doing so can cause  
damage to the AC IN connector of the projector and (or) the  
prong plug of the power cable. To turn off the AC power sup-  
ply when the projector is powered on, use the Main Power  
Switch.  
Do not turn off the AC power supply within 10 seconds of  
making adjustment or setting changes and closing the menu.  
Doing so can cause loss of adjustments and settings and re-  
turn to default.  
After Use  
Preparation: Make sure that the main power is turned off.  
1. Unplug the power cable.  
2. Disconnect any other cables.  
3. Retract adjustable tilt feet if extended.  
4. Cover the lens with the lens cap.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Convenient Features  
PIP  
FREEZE  
ASPECT LAMP MODE AUTO ADJ.  
Turning Off the Image and Sound  
VOLUME MAGNIFY  
PAGE  
UP  
Press the PIC-MUTE button to turn off the image and sound for a short period of  
DOWN  
PICTURE  
PIC-MUTE  
3D REFORM  
time. Press again to restore the image and sound.  
HELP  
NOTE: Even though the image is turned off, the menu still remains on the screen.  
L-CLICK  
MOUSE  
R-CLICK  
PIP  
FREEZE  
Freezing a Picture  
ASPECT LAMODE AUTO ADJ.  
VOLUME
PAGE  
P  
Press the FREEZE button to freeze a picture. Press again to resume motion.  
DOWN  
NOTE: The image is frozen but the original video is still playing back.  
PICTURE  
PIC-MUTE  
3D REFORM  
HELP  
Enlarging and Moving a Picture  
You can enlarge the area you want up to 400 percent.  
To do so:  
PIP  
FREEZE  
1. Press the MAGNIFY (+) button.  
ASPECT LAMP MODE AUTO ADJ.  
VOLUME MAGNIFY  
PAGE  
UP  
Each time the MAGNIFY (+) button is pressed,  
the image is magnified.  
DOWN  
PICTURE  
PIC-MUTE  
RM  
ELP  
* Image can be magnified up to 400%  
POWER  
POWER  
2. Press the SELECT  
button.  
  
OFF  
ON  
COMPUTER  
1
2
VIEWER  
NETWORK  
VIDEO  
The area of the magnified image will be moved  
COMPONENT  
3
S-VIDEO  
3. Press the MAGNIFY (−) button.  
SELECT  
Each time the MAGNIFY (−) button is pressed,  
the image is reduced.  
PIP  
FREEZE  
ASPECT LAMP MODE AUTO ADJ.  
VOLUME MAGNIFY  
PAGE  
UP  
DOWN  
PICTURE  
PIC-MUTE  
3D REFORM  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Convenient Features  
Changing Lamp Mode  
The lamp life can be extended by using the Eco mode.  
T
T
I
E
X
R
E
LASER  
To change to the [ECO] mode, do the following:  
L-CLICK  
PIP  
R-CLICK  
MOUSE  
FREEZE  
1. Press the LAMP MODE button to display [LAMP MODE] screen.  
ASPECT LAMP MODE AUTO ADJ.  
2. Use the SELECT or button to select [ECO] mode.  
VOLUME MAGFY  
PAGE  
UP  
3. Press the ENTER button.  
N  
PICTURE  
PIC-MUTE  
REFORM  
HELP  
To cancel it, press the EXIT button.  
To change from [ECO] to [NORMAL], Go back to Step 2 and select [NORMAL].  
Repeat Step 3.  
Lamp Mode  
NORMAL  
Description  
Status of LAMP indicator  
Off  
This is the Default setting  
(100% Brightness).  
ECO  
Select this mode to increase the lamp  
life (approx. 80% Brightness (light  
output) on NP3250/NP3250W and  
approx. 88% Brightness (light output)  
on NP2250/NP1250)  
Steady Green light  
NOTE:  
• The projector is always in [NORMAL] for one minute after the lamp is turned on and while the POWER indicator is blinking  
green. The lamp condition will not be affected even when [LAMP MODE] is changed.  
• After a lapse of one minute from when the projector displays a blue, black or logo screen, [LAMP MODE] will automatically  
switch to [ECO].  
The projector will return to the [NORMAL] once a signal is accepted.  
T
T
I
POWER  
POWER  
OFF  
ON  
Getting Integrated Help  
LASER  
COMPUTER  
1
2
VIEWER  
VIDEO  
L-CLICK  
PIP  
R-CLICK  
MOUSE  
FREEZE  
COMPONENT  
You get the contents about Help in English, German  
3
S-VIDEO  
NETWORK  
and Japanese.  
ASPECT LAMP MODE AUTO ADJ.  
VOLUME MAGNIFY  
PAGE  
UP  
SELECT  
1. Press the HELP button on the remote control.  
DOWN  
PICTURE  
PIC-MUTE  
3D REFORM  
HELP  
• When no menus appear, the “How to Use Help”  
screen will be displayed.  
When menus appear, the screen will be displayed,  
explaining the function of a highlighted item.  
Display Help  
Exit Help  
2. Use the SELECT or button to scroll the view-  
ing area.  
3. Press the EXIT button.  
• The Help will be closed.  
3ꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Convenient Features  
Using a USB Mouse  
USB  
Using a USB mouse gives you a smooth operation. A commercially  
available USB mouse can be used.  
USB(LAN)  
Menu items that can be operated with your USB mouse are:  
VIEWER  
NETWORK  
ENTRY LIST  
TOOLS  
SECURITY SETTINGS  
NETWORK SETTINGS  
CORNERSTONE  
NOTE: We do not warrant that the USB port of the projector will support all USB mouse devices in the market.  
NOTE: Do not try to insert the plug of your USB mouse into the LAN port (LAN) of the projector.  
Doing so can cause damage to the LAN port.  
Operate the Menus using the USB mouse  
Mouse Cursor  
When connecting a USB mouse to the projector, you get a mouse cursor on the screen.  
Unless you use your USB mouse within 10 seconds, the mouse cursor disappears.  
Adjusting and Setting Display  
You can select a menu item and click with the left mouse button to make adjustments and settings.  
With the middle button you can use a scroll bar in the menu or the help.  
Icons on the top right of the menu  
Click [Clock] symbol to display the [DATE, TIME PRESET] menu.  
Click [Network] symbol to display the [NETWORK SETTINGS] menu. ( page 110)  
Click [Mouse] symbol to display the [MOUSE] menu.  
Click [?] to display a selection of the selected menu item.  
3ꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Convenient Features  
Using the Optional Remote Mouse Receiver (NP01MR)  
The optional remote mouse receiver enables you to operate your computer’s mouse functions from the remote con-  
trol. It is a great convenience for your computer-generated presentations.  
Connecting the remote mouse receiver to your computer  
If you wish to use the remote mouse function, connect the mouse receiver and computer.  
The mouse receiver can be connected directly to the computer’s USB port (type A).  
NOTE: Depending on the type of connection or OS installed on your computer, you may have to restart your computer or change  
your computer settings.  
Computer  
Remote mouse receiver  
To USB port of PC or Macintosh  
When operating a computer via the remote mouse receiver  
7 m/22 feet  
30  
30  
Remote sensor on the remote mouse receiver  
When connecting using the USB port  
For PC, the mouse receiver can only be used with a Windows 98/Me/XP*, Windows 2000, Windows Vista, or  
Mac OS X 10.0.0 or later operating system.  
* NOTE: In SP1 or older version of Windows XP, if the mouse cursor will not move correctly, do the following:  
Clear the Enhance pointer precision check box underneath the mouse speed slider in the Mouse Properties dialog box [Pointer  
Options tab].  
NOTE: The PAGE UP and DOWN buttons do not work with PowerPoint for Macintosh.  
NOTE: Wait at least 5 seconds after disconnecting the mouse receiver before reconnecting it and vice versa. The computer may  
not identify the mouse receiver if it is repeatedly connected and disconnected in rapid intervals.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Convenient Features  
Operating your computer’s mouse from the remote control  
You can operate your computer’s mouse from the remote control.  
PAGE.UP/DOWN.Button....................scrolls.the.viewing.area.of.the.window.or.to.move.to.the.previous.or.next.slide.in.Power-  
Point.on.your.computer.  
SELECT..Button...................moves.the.mouse.cursor.on.your.computer.  
MOUSE.L-CLICK.Button...................works.as.the.mouse.left.button.  
MOUSE.R-CLICK.Button...................works.as.the.mouse.right.button.  
NOTE:  
• When you operate the computer using the SELECT  button with the menu displayed, both the menu and the mouse  
pointer will be affected. Close the menu and perform the mouse operation.  
• The PAGE UP and DOWN buttons do not work with PowerPoint for Macintosh.  
About Drag Mode:  
By pressing the MOUSE L-CLICK or R-CLICK button for 2 or 3 seconds then releasing, the drag mode is set and  
the drag operation can be performed simply by pressing the SELECT  
MOUSE L-CLICK (or R-CLICK) button. To cancel it, press the MOUSE R-CLICK (or L-CLICK) button.  
button. To drop the item, press the  
  
TIP: You can change the Pointer speed on the Mouse Properties dialog box on the Windows. For more information, see the user  
documentation or online help supplied with your computer.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Convenient Features  
Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion [COR-  
NERSTONE]  
Use the 3D Reform feature to correct keystone (trapezoidal) distortion to make the top or bottom and the left or  
right side of the screen longer or shorter so that the projected image is rectangular.  
Cornerstone  
1. Press and hold the 3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds to reset current adjustments.  
Current adjustments for [KEYSTONE] or [CORNERSTONE] will be cleared.  
2. Project an image so that the screen is smaller than the area of the raster.  
3. Pick up any one of the corners and align the corner of the image with a corner of the screen.  
Projected image  
The drawing shows the up-  
per right corner.  
TIP:  
NP3250/NP2250/NP1250: When [WIDE SCREEN] is selected from  
[SCREEN TYPE], lines that show “16:9” will be displayed. Click the  
outer corners.  
NP3250W: When [4:3 SCREEN] is selected from [SCREEN TYPE],  
lines that show “4:3” will be displayed. Click the outer corners.  
4. Press the 3D REFORM button twice.  
The Cornerstone adjustment screen is displayed.  
The drawing shows the upper left  
icon ( ) is selected.  
TIP: If you are adjusting [KEYSTONE], [CORNERSTONE] will not be  
available. If this happens, press and hold the 3D REFORM button for a  
minimum of 2 seconds to reset the [KEYSTONE] adjustments.  
5. Use the SELECT  
button to select one icon ( ) which points in the direction you wish to move the  
  
projected image frame.  
6. Press the ENTER button.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Convenient Features  
7. Use the SELECT  
button to move the projected image frame as shown on the example.  
  
8. Press the ENTER button.  
9. Use the SELECT  
button to select another icon which points in the direction.  
  
On the Cornerstone adjustment screen, select [EXIT] or press the EXIT button on the remote control.  
The confirmation screen is displayed.  
10.Press the SELECT or button to highlight the [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
This completes the Cornerstone correction.  
Selecting [CANCEL] will return to the adjustment screen without saving changes (Step 3).  
Selecting [RESET] will return to the factory default.  
Selecting [UNDO] will exit without saving changes.  
NOTE: To reset the 3D Reform correction setting values, press and hold the 3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds.  
NOTE: During 3D Reform adjustment, [ASPECT RATIO] and [SCREEN] may not be available. Should this happen, first reset the  
3D Reform data and then do each setting. Second repeat the 3D Reform adjustment. Changing [ASPECT RATIO] and/or [SCREEN]  
setting can limit [3D REFORM] in its adjustable range.  
4ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Convenient Features  
The adjustable ranges for 3D Reform are as follows:  
HORIZONTAL  
VERTICAL  
CORNERSTONE  
KEYSTONE  
Max. +/− 40° approx.  
Max. +/− 30° approx.  
* The following are conditions under which the maximum angle is achieved:  
When the standard lens is used  
When the lens shift is set to the center  
When the lens shift is used and yet the image is not displayed in the center of the screen, the adjustable  
range will be increased or decreased.  
Image is projected in Wide (Zoom lever)  
NOTE:  
• Even when the projector is turned on, the last used correction values are applied.  
• If the Cornerstone screen is unavailable (grayed), press and hold the 3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds to reset  
the current correction data. The Cornerstone function becomes available.  
• Turning on the projector will reset the previous correction setting values and correct distortion anew if the projection angle is  
changed from the last use.  
If the projection angle is the same as in the last use, the previous correction setting values are retained in the memory.  
• The range of keystone correction is not the maximum tilt angle of projector.  
NOTE: Using 3D Reform correction can cause the image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically.  
4ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Convenient Features  
Displaying Two Pictures at the Same Time  
9
The projector has a feature that allows you to view two different signals simultaneously. You have two modes: PIP  
mode and Side by Side mode.  
From the menu you can select [SETUP]  
[BASIC]  
[PIP/SIDE BY SIDE].  
The [PIP/SIDE BY SIDE] menu item has the following three options: MODE, POSITION, and SOURCE.  
Use the SELECT or button to select [MODE], [POSITION] or [SOURCE] and press the ENTER button.  
Selecting the PIP or SIDE BY SIDE Mode [MODE]  
This option allows you to select two modes: PIP and SIDE BY SIDE.  
Use the SELECT or button to select [PIP] or [SIDE BY SIDE] and press the ENTER button.  
PIP: This option allows you to view a sub picture in the main picture.  
Main picture  
Sub  
picture  
SIDE BY SIDE: This allows you to view two pictures side by side.  
Main picture  
Sub picture  
NOTE:  
• The main picture will be displayed on the left side and the sub picture on the right side.  
• The main picture signal supports the COMPUTER 1 IN and the COMPUTER 2 IN connectors.  
The sub picture signal supports the VIDEO IN and S-VIDEO IN connectors.  
• The main picture supports an RGB signal with a resolution of 1280 × 1024 pixels or less  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Convenient Features  
Viewing Two Pictures  
1. Press the PIP button on the remote control.  
The PIP/SIDE BY SIDE SOURCE screen will be displayed.  
2. Use the SELECT or button to select the source and press the ENTER button.  
The PIP screen or SIDE BY SIDE screen will be displayed, depending on which was selected in the [MODE] set-  
ting screen.  
3. Press the PIP button again to return to the normal screen (single picture).  
TIP:  
• Selecting another source will return to the normal screen.  
• Selecting a source not supported for the main picture or the sub picture will return to the normal screen.  
[POSITION]  
This option allows you to select the position of a sub picture in the main picture.  
NOTE:  
• The default setting is [BOTTOM-RIGHT].  
Use the SELECT or button to select the sub picture’s position and press the ENTER button.  
The options are: TOP-LEFT, TOP-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, and BOTTOM-RIGHT.  
The following adjustments and settings are available for the main picture only.  
- Adjusting picture and sound  
- Magnifying a picture  
The following operations are available for both the main and sub pictures.  
- Picture and audio mute  
- Freezing a moving picture  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Convenient Features  
Preventing Unauthorized Use of the Projector  
Assigning a keyword prevents the projector from being used by unauthorized individuals.  
Turning on the Security function by assigning a keyword for the first time  
1. Press the MENU button.  
The menu will be displayed.  
2. Press the SELECT button to highlight the [SETUP] submenu and press the ENTER button.  
The page tab [BASIC] will be highlighted.  
3. Press the SELECT button twice to highlight the page tab [INSTALLATION(2)].  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Convenient Features  
4. Press the SELECT button three times to highlight [SECURITY SETTINGS].  
5. Press the ENTER button to display the SECURITY SETTINGS menu.  
6. Press the SELECT button four times to highlight [SECURITY-SETTINGS] and press the ENTER button.  
The Security screen will be displayed.  
7. Press the SELECT button once to highlight the Keyword entry box and press the ENTER button.  
The Software keyboard will be displayed.  
4ꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Convenient Features  
8. Enter an alphanumeric keyword using the Software keyboard.  
For example, to enter “1234”, follow the steps 8-1 to 8-4 below.  
NOTE:  
• When using your USB mouse, click each number or alphabet.  
BS: Delete the character before the cursor or highlight.  
: Confirm the keyword and close the Software keyboard.  
• The keyword must be 1 to 10 characters long.  
• Please make a note of your keyword.  
Enter a keyword by using the remote control.  
8-1. Press the MENU button and the AUTO.ADJ. button to enter “1”.  
The asterisk “ ” will be displayed in the keyword entry box.  
8-2. Press the MENU button and the SELECT button to enter “2”.  
The asterisk “  
” will be displayed in the keyword entry box.  
  
8-3. Press the MENU button and the SELECT button to enter “3”.  
The asterisk “  
” will be displayed in the keyword entry box.  
  
8-4. Press the MENU button and the SELECT button to enter “4”.  
The asterisk “  
” will be displayed in the keyword entry box.  
  
8-5. Press the ENTER button.  
9. Press the SELECT button once to highlight [OFF] and press the SELECT button to highlight [ON].  
4ꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Convenient Features  
10.Press the SELECT button to highlight [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
The confirmation screen will be displayed.  
11.Press the SELECT or button to highlight [YES] and press the ENTER button.  
The Security Function will take effect when the projector is turned on next time.  
Checking If Security is enabled  
Turn off the projector and turn it back on to check if the Security function is enabled.  
1. Press the POWER (ON/STANDBY) button.  
The [POWER OFF / ARE YOU SURE?] message will appear.  
Press the ENTER button or the POWER (ON/STANDBY) or the POWER OFF button again.  
The lamp lights off and the POWER indicator flashes orange. Please wait until the POWER indicator changes  
from flashing to steady light.  
2. When the POWER indicator lights steady orange, push the Main POWER switch to the off position (O).  
The projector will turn off.  
3. Push the Main POWER switch to the on position (I).  
The POWER indicator lights orange. The projector is in standby condition.  
4. Press and hold the POWER (ON/STANDBY) button for a minimum of two seconds.  
The projector will turn on. The [PROJECTOR IS LOCKED! ENTER YOUR KEYWORD.] message will be dis-  
played at the bottom of the screen.  
5. Press the MENU button.  
The Keyword entry screen will be displayed  
6. Press the ENTER button.  
The Software keyboard will be displayed.  
7. Use the same procedures as steps 1 to 8 described in the “Turning on the Security function by assigning  
a keyword for the first time” section to enter “1234”.  
Each time one number is entered, an “ ” (asterisk) will appear. Keyword appears as asterisks so the real key-  
word is hidden.  
8. After entering your keyword, highlight [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
The Software keyboard will disappear. This will allow you to operate the projector.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Convenient Features  
Disabling the Security  
1. Press the MENU button.  
The menu will be displayed.  
NOTE: Immediately after the projector has been turned on and the “PROJECTOR IS LOCKED! ENTER YOUR KEYWORD.” mes-  
sage is displayed at the bottom of the screen, pressing the MENU button will display the Keyword entry will be displayed. At  
this time, pressing the MENU button will display the menu.  
2. Press the SELECT button to highlight [SETUP] and press the ENTER button.  
The page tab [BASIC] will be highlighted.  
3. Press the SELECT button twice to highlight the page tab [INSTALLATION(2)].  
4. Press the SELECT  
ton.  
button three times to highlight [SECURITY SETTINGS] and press the ENTER but-  
5. Press the SELECT button four times to highlight [SECURITY]  
[SETTINGS] and press the ENTER but-  
ton.  
The Keyword entry screen will be displayed  
6. Press the ENTER button.  
The Software keyboard will be displayed.  
7. Use the same procedures as steps 1 to 8 described in the “Turning on the Security function by assigning  
a keyword for the first time” section to enter “1234”.  
Each time one number is entered, an “ ” (asterisk) will appear. Keyword appears as asterisks so the real key-  
word is hidden.  
8. After entering your keyword, highlight [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
The Software keyboard will disappear. The Security screen will be displayed.  
9. Highlight [ON] and press the SELECT button to highlight [OFF].  
10.Press the SELECT button to highlight [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
The Security Function will be disabled when the projector is turned on next time.  
NOTE: Do not forget your keyword. However, if you forget your keyword, NEC or your dealer will provide you with your Release  
Code upon proof of ownership.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Convenient Features  
Limiting Access Level to Available Menu Items  
The Account function allows you to manage available menu items by user level.  
The projector has two menu modes: the ADVANCED menu and the BASIC menu.  
ADVANCED.menu... This.is.the.menu.that.contains.all.the.available.menus.and.commands..Users.with.an.ADMINISTRATOR.or.  
ADVANCED.account.can.access.the.ADVANCED.menu.  
BASIC.menu........... This.is.the.basic.menu.that.contains.minimum.essentials.of.menus.and.commands..Users.with.a.BASIC.  
account.can.access.the.BASIC.menu.  
See page 51 for settings available to ADVANCED and BASIC menus.  
NOTE:  
• A user with an ADMINISTRATOR account that has no password set is registered at the factory.  
This will allow the user to access the ACCOUNT items without password entry.  
Logging On  
Logging on your projector  
When a user is registered, trying to display the menu will display the LOGON screen, prompting the user to select  
the user and to enter the password.  
NOTE: If one user logs on to the projector, any other user cannot log on.  
1. Enter a user name.  
2. Enter the registered password if you have it.  
3. Select [OK].  
NOTE: Do not forget your password. If you forget your password, ask your administrator. If your administrator forget the pass-  
word, ask NEC or your dealer. NEC or your dealer will provide you with your Release Code (24 character length) upon proof of  
ownership.  
Logging Off  
Logging off your projector  
Logging off your projector will prevent an unauthorized user from operating your projector.  
1. From the menu, select [SETUP]  
2. Select [YES].  
[BASIC]  
[LOGOFF].  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Convenient Features  
Creating or Adding a User  
1. From the menu, select [SETUP]  
[INSTALLATION(2)]  
[SECURITY SETTINGS].  
2. Select [ACCOUNT]-[SETTINGS].  
The [ACCOUNT] setting screen will be displayed.  
3. Select [CREATE].  
The [CREATE] screen will be displayed.  
4. Enter a user name, user type, and password.  
A user name must be 16 alphanumeric characters or less (case sensitive).  
User type has two options: [ADVANCED] and [BASIC].  
Use the software keyboard to enter a password in the NEW PASSWORD entry field.  
A password must be 10 alphanumeric characters or less. If no password is set, the user is registered without a  
password.  
After entering a password, enter the same password in [CONFIRM PASSWORD] input screen again.  
Make a note of your password.  
5. Place a checkmark on [ENABLE].  
The account will be made available.  
6. Select [OK].  
This will complete adding a user.  
NOTE: Up to 12 user names can be created.  
5ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Convenient Features  
Editing a User (Changing Account Settings)  
1. From the menu, select [SETUP]  
[INSTALLATION(2)]  
[SECURITY SETTINGS].  
NOTE: A user with an ADMINISTRATOR account is recommended to change the account settings.  
2. Select [ACCOUNT]-[SETTINGS].  
The [ACCOUNT] setting screen will be displayed.  
3. Select a user name you wish to edit.  
4. Select [EDIT].  
The [EDIT] screen will be displayed.  
Enter your password and press the ENTER button.  
If no password is set, simply press the ENTER button without entering any password.  
5. Change the settings and select [OK].  
Deleting a User  
1. From the menu, select [SETUP]  
[INSTALLATION(2)]  
[SECURITY SETTINGS].  
NOTE: A user with an ADMINISTRATOR account is recommended to delete the account settings.  
2. Select [ACCOUNT]-[SETTINGS].  
The [ACCOUNT] setting screen will be displayed.  
3. Select a user name you wish to delete.  
4. Select [DELETE].  
The [DELETE] screen will be displayed.  
Enter your password and press the ENTER button.  
The confirmation screen will be displayed.  
5. Select [YES].  
This will complete deleting the user.  
NOTE: Do not forget your password. If you forget your password, ask your administrator. If your administrator forget the pass-  
word, ask NEC or your dealer. NEC or your dealer will provide you with your Release Code (24 character length) upon proof of  
ownership.  
5ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Convenient Features  
Operation Using an HTTP Browser  
L
Overview  
The use of HTTP server functions will allow control of the projector from a web browser without the installation of  
special software. Please be sure to use “Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.x” or a higher version for the web browser. (This  
device uses “JavaScript” and “Cookies” and the browser should be set to accept these functions. The setting meth-  
od will vary depending on the version of browser. Please refer to the help files and the other information provided in  
your software.)  
Access is gained to the HTTP server functions by specifying  
http:// <the projector’s IP address> /index.html  
in the entry column of the URL.  
NOTE:  
When a password is set for [HTTP SERVER] from [SECURITY], the log-on screen will be displayed. Enter a user name and your  
password.  
• A user name must be between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters.  
• Password is the one assigned in [HTTP SERVER] of [SECURITY SETTINGS].  
NOTE:  
• The display’s or button’s response can be slowed down or operation may not be accepted depending the settings of your net-  
work. Should this happen, consult your network administrator.  
The projector may not respond if its buttons are repeatedly pressed in rapid intervals. Should this happen, wait a moment and  
repeat. If you still can’t get any response, turn off and back on the projector.  
• Do not use the HTTP Server functions and PC Control Utility 3.0 included on the supplied CD-ROM. Using both at the same time  
may result in a connection failure or slow response.  
Preparation Before Use  
Make network connections and set up the projector and confirm that it is complete before engaging in browser op-  
erations. ( [NETWORK SETTINGS] on page 19)  
Operation with a browser that uses a proxy server may not be possible depending on the type of proxy server and  
the setting method. Although the type of proxy server will be a factor, it is possible that items that have actually been  
set will not be displayed depending on the effectiveness of the cache, and the contents set from the browser may  
not be reflected in operation. It is recommended that a proxy server not be used unless it is unavoidable.  
Handling of the Address for Operation via a Browser  
Regarding the actual address that is entered for the address or entered to the URL column when operation of the  
projector is via a browser, the host name can be used as it is when the host name corresponding to the IP address  
of the projector has been registered to the domain name server by a network administrator, or the host name cor-  
responding to the IP address of the projector has been set in the “HOSTS” file of the computer being used.  
Example 1: When the host name of the projector has been set to “pj.nec.co.jp”,  
http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html  
is specified for the address or the entry column of the URL.  
Example 2: When the IP address of the projector is “192.168.73.1”, access is gained to the  
HTTP server functions by specifying  
http://192.168.73.1/index.html  
for the address or the entry column of the URL.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Convenient Features  
Structure of the HTTP Server  
POWER: This controls the power of the projector.  
ON.....................................Power is switched on.  
OFF...................................Power is switched off.  
LOGOFF: This allows you to log off and return to the log-on screen.  
VOLUME: This controls the volume of the projector.  
......................................Increases the volume adjustment value.  
......................................Decreases the volume adjustment value.  
AV-MUTE: This controls the mute function of the projector.  
PICTURE ON....................Mutes the video.  
PICTURE OFF ..................Cancels the video muting.  
SOUND ON.......................Mutes the audio.  
SOUND OFF.....................Cancels the audio muting.  
OSD ON............................Mutes the on-screen display.  
OSD OFF ..........................Cancels the muting of the on-screen display.  
ALL ON .............................Mutes each of the video, audio, and on-screen display functions.  
ALL OFF............................Cancels the muting of each of the video, audio, and on-screen display functions.  
PICTURE: This controls the video adjustment of the projector.  
BRIGHTNESS ..............Increases the brightness adjustment value.  
BRIGHTNESS ..............Decreases the brightness adjustment value.  
CONTRAST  
CONTRAST  
.................Increases the contrast adjustment value.  
.................Decreases the contrast adjustment value.  
COLOR  
COLOR  
........................Increases the color adjustment value.  
........................Decreases the color adjustment value.  
HUE ..............................Increases the hue adjustment value.  
HUE ..............................Decreases the hue adjustment value.  
SHARPNESS  
SHARPNESS  
...............Increases the sharpness adjustment value.  
...............Decreases the sharpness adjustment value.  
The functions that can be controlled will vary depending on the signal being input to the projector. ( page 90)  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Convenient Features  
SOURCE SELECT: This switches the input connector of the projector.  
COMPUTER1....................Switches to the COMPUTER 1 IN connector.  
COMPUTER2....................Switches to the COMPUTER 2 IN connector.  
COMPUTER3....................Switches to the COMPUTER 3 (DVI-D) IN connector.  
COMPONENT...................Switches to the COMPONENT IN connectors.  
VIDEO...............................Switches to the VIDEO IN connector.  
S-VIDEO ...........................Switches to the S-VIDEO IN connector.  
VIEWER............................Switches to the data on the USB memory device.  
NETWORK........................Switches to a LAN signal.  
PROJECTOR STATUS: This displays the condition of the projector.  
LAMP LIFE REMAINING .....Displays the remaining life of the lamp as a percentage.  
LAMP HOURS USED.......Displays how many hours the lamp has been used.  
FILTER HOURS USED ....Displays how many hours the filter has been used.  
ERROR STATUS..............Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Convenient Features  
Projecting Your Computer’s Screen Image from the Projector  
M
via a Network [NETWORK PROJECTOR]  
A Windows Vista-based computer can be operated using the projector over a network. The projector supports the  
Network Projector function of Windows Vista.  
By selecting the projector connected to the same network as that of your PC, the PC screen image can be project-  
ed to the screen via network. There is no need of connection using the VGA signal cable.  
LEF  
LEN  
T
S
S
HIF  
T
RIG  
HT  
DOW  
N
UP  
SEL  
ECT  
3D  
REF  
ORM  
AUT  
O
A
DJU  
ST  
SOU  
RCE  
O
/S
N
LAN  
US  
LAM  
B
B
STA  
P
POW TUS  
ER  
W
I
E
E
S
S
E
E
I
W
The projector supports the Network Projector function of Windows Vista.  
Operation Environment  
Applicable OS  
Windows Vista (32-bit version) Home Premium  
Windows Vista (32-bit version) Business  
Windows Vista (32-bit version) Ultimate  
Windows Vista (32-bit version) Enterprise  
(Note) This function is not available on Windows Vista Home Basic.  
Hardware specifications  
The specifications recommended by Microsoft as the operation environment for  
Windows Vista should be satisfied.  
Network Environment  
Screen color  
Wired LAN or wireless LAN environment that supports TCP/IP is required.  
High Color (16 bits)  
True Color (24 bits and 32 bits)  
* Setting with 256 colors or less is not available.  
Setting the Projector to Network Projector Input Mode  
1. With the projector turned on, press the SOURCE button.  
The input selection window appears.  
Another way to display the input selection window is to press the NETWORK button on the remote control. The  
NETWORK screen will be displayed. Go to step 3.  
5ꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Convenient Features  
2. Press the SELECT or button to select [NETWORK] and press the ENTER button.  
In the screen, the [NETWORK] menu is displayed.  
3. From the [NETWORK] menu, select [NETWORK PROJECTOR].  
The [PROJECTOR NAME/DISPLAY RESOLUTION/PASSWORD/URL] will be displayed.  
TIP:  
• To change the default password “1234”, select [CHANGE] and press the ENTER button.  
The [ENTER PASSWORD] screen will be displayed, Enter a numeric password. The password must be eight characters or less.  
The changed password stored in the projector will be displayed in the [NETWORK PROJECTOR] screen next time.  
Changing the resolution of Windows Vista screen to the information on [DISPLAY RESOLUTION]  
in the NETWORK PROJECTOR screen.  
• When using Windows Vista Service Pack 1(SP1), skip the following steps and go on to “Projecting the Image with Network  
Projector” on the next page.  
1. Click [Start] from the desktop of Windows Vista.  
2. Click [Control Panel].  
3. Click [Adjust screen resolution] displayed under [Appearance and Personalization].  
5ꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Convenient Features  
4. Operate [Resolution] slide bar to change the resolution to the resolution displayed on [DISPLAY RESO-  
LUTION] in the NETWORK PROJECTOR screen.  
5. Click [OK].  
The message “Do you keep this screen setting?” is displayed.  
6. Click [Yes].  
The resolution of Windows Vista screen is changed to the resolution displayed on [DISPLAY RESOLUTION] in  
the NETWORK PROJECTOR screen.  
Projecting the Image with Network Projector  
1. Click [Start] from the desktop of Windows Vista.  
2. Click [All Programs].  
3. Click [Accessories].  
4. Click [Connect to a Network Projector].  
When the [Permission Connect to a Network Projector] window appears,click [Yes.].  
The “Connect to a Network Projector” window appears.  
5. Click [ Search for a projector (recommended)].  
In the “Available projectors” box, “NP3250 Series” is displayed.  
6. Click [NP3250 Series].  
The message “Enter the password for the projector that you selected.is displayed at the bottom of the window.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Convenient Features  
7. Check the password displayed in the screen projected by the projector.  
8. Input the password to the password input box displayed by the operation at step 3 on page 57.  
9. Click [Connect].  
The network projector function works and the screen of Windows Vista is projected from the projector.  
On Windows Vista Service Pack 1(SP1), if the resolution of Windows Vista screen is different from the projec-  
tor’s screen resolution, changing the resolution of Windows Vista will display a message for prompting the  
user to change the resolution of Windows Vista screen. Selecting [Yes] will change the resolution of Windows  
Vista screen and proceed to the step of operating the network projector. Selecting [No] will cancel operating  
the network projector.  
NOTE: When the network projector function works, the background color of the desktop changes to black. When the network  
projector function is stopped, the original background color is restored.  
Reference: If the projector cannot be found at Step 5, click [  
Enter the projector address]. Then, input the “Network ad-  
dress” (Input example: http://10.32.97.61/lan) and “Projectorpassword” (Input example: 82291627) displayed in the screen  
projected from the projector.  
Exiting the Network Projector Operation  
1. Click [Projecting: NP3250 Series] in the Windows Vista task bar.  
2. Click [Disconnect].  
The Network Projector function is stopped.  
3. Press the SOURCE button of the projector to select an input terminal other than [NETWORK].  
When using the remote control, press a button other than the NETWORK button.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Convenient Features  
Using the Projector to Operate Your Computer via a Network  
N
[REMOTE DESKTOP]  
By selecting the PC connected to the same network as that of the projector, the PC screen image can be pro-  
jected to the screen via network.  
Then, by operating the keyboard, you can operate Windows Vista on the PC connected with the network.  
With the Remote Desktop function, you can remotely operate the PC placed at a distance from the projector.  
Meeting room  
LEFT  
LENS  
SHIFT  
RIGH  
T
DOWN  
UP  
SELE  
CT  
3D  
R
EFOR  
M
AUTO  
ADJU  
ST  
SOUR  
CE  
ON/S  
TAND  
B
US  
TAMP  
B
LAN  
OW  
U
S
E
R
W
R
   E
S
L
   I
Office  
NOTE:  
• The [REMOTE DESKTOP] function will work on the following Windows Vista editions.  
Windows Vista (32-bit version) Business  
Windows Vista (32-bit version) Ultimate  
Windows Vista (32-bit version) Enterprise  
(Note) The [REMOTE DESKTOP] function will not work on Windows Vista Home Basic and Windows Vista Home Premium.  
• In this user’s manual this feature is described using Windows Vista as an example, but Windows XP Professional Service Pack  
2 or later will also work with this feature.  
• A keyboard is required to use the Remote Desktop function.  
• The Remote Desktop function can be operated with a keyboard only. Using a wireless mouse with a wireless keyboard is more  
useful for operating.  
Use a commercially available wireless keyboard, a wireless mouse, and a USB wireless receiver.  
Use a commercially available USB keyboard and USB mouse.  
• A USB keyboard with a built-in USB hub cannot be used with the projector.  
• A wireless keyboard or mouse that supports Bluetooth cannot be used with the projector.  
Prepare a commercially available wireless keyboard (US layout version).  
NOTE: We do not warrant that the USB port of the projector will support all USB devices in the market.  
Connect the USB wireless receiver to the USB port (Type A) of the projector. Make all necessary settings for your  
wireless keyboard and mouse.  
L
L
E
E
F
N
T
S
S
H
H
IF  
T
R
IG  
T
D
O
W
N
U
P
S
E
L
E
C
T
3D REFOR  
M
AU  
TO ADJU
SOU  
RC  
E
ON/ST  
A
U
S
B
B
LAMP  
Y
ST  
A
PO  
TU  
S
W
E
R
W
I
E
L
E
S
S
S
S
E
L
E
R
I
W
ꢂ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Convenient Features  
Setting the password to the user account of Windows Vista  
TIP: If a password has been set for an account, the steps 1 to 9 can be skipped.  
1. Click [Start] from the desktop of Windows Vista.  
2. Click [Control Panel].  
3. Click [Add or remove user accounts] displayed under [User Accounts].  
4. When the [User Account Control] confirmation window appears, click [Continue].  
5. Click [Administrator].  
6. Click [Create a password].  
7. Input the password to the [New password] box.  
8. Input the same password as that at Step 7 to the [Confirm new password] box.  
9. Click [Create a password].  
The Administrator is changed to [Password Protection].  
Setting the Remote Access  
1. Click [Start] from the desktop of Windows Vista.  
2. Click [Control Panel].  
3. Click [System and Maintenance].  
4. Click [Allow remote access] displayed under [System].  
5. When the [User Account Control] confirmation window appears, click [Continue].  
The [System Properties] window appears.  
6. Click [Allow connections from computers running any version of Remote Desktop (less secure)] in the  
Remote Desktop box and click [OK].  
Checking the IP address on Windows Vista  
1. Click [Start] from the desktop of Windows Vista.  
2. Click [Control Panel].  
3. Click [View network status and tasks] displayed under [Network and Internet].  
ꢂꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Convenient Features  
4. Click [View status] displayed in blue on the right of [Local Area Connection] in the window.  
The [Local Area Connection Status] window appears.  
5. Click [Details...].  
Write down the value for “IPv4 IP Address” (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) displayed.  
6. Click [Close].  
7. Click [X] at the upper right of the window.  
The system goes back to the desktop.  
Starting the Remote Desktop  
1. With the projector turned on, press the SOURCE button.  
The input selection window appears.  
Another way to display the input selection window is to press the NETWORK button on the remote control. The  
NETWORK screen will be displayed. Go to step 3.  
ꢂꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Convenient Features  
2. Press the SELECT or button to select [NETWORK] and press the ENTER button.  
The [NETWORK] menu will be displayed.  
3. From the [NETWORK] menu, use the wireless keyboard to select [REMOTE DESKTOP CONNECTION].  
The [REMOTE DESKTOP CONNECTION] window appears.  
TIP:  
Setting [OPTIONS] in REMOTE DESKTOP  
Clicking [OPTIONS] displays the [PERFORMANCE] screen.  
Making settings to [OPTIONS] will allow you to display the desktop background, or to enable the window animation function  
during the Remote Desktop operation. However, doing this will cause the display’s or mouse’s response to slow down.  
If the display’s or mouse’s response is slowed down, try one or more of the following:  
DESKTOP BACKGROUND: Clear the check mark to display the desktop background in monochrome.  
MENU AND WINDOW ANIMATION: Clear the check mark to disable menu and window animation.  
THEMES: Clear the check mark not to use Themes.  
SHOW CONTENTS OF WINDOW WHILE DRAGGING: Clear the check mark to show only the window pane  
while dragging.  
4. Operate the wireless keyboard to input the IP address of Windows Vista and click [CONNECT].  
The log-on screen of Windows Vista is displayed in the screen projected by the projector.  
5. Operate the wireless keyboard to input the user’s password and press [Enter].  
The remote desktop function is started.  
Windows Vista desktop is displayed in the screen projected by the projector.  
Log out the computer.  
Use the wireless keyboard connected to the projector to operate Windows Vista.  
NOTE: When the projection is made with the remote desktop function, the background color of the desktop is changed to  
black.  
ꢂ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Convenient Features  
Exiting the Remote Desktop  
1. Operate the wireless keyboard to click [Start] from the desktop screen projected by the projector.  
2. Click [X] on the right of the start menu.  
The remote desktop function is stopped.  
3. Press the SOURCE button of the projector to select an input terminal other than [NETWORK].  
When using the remote control, press a button other than the NETWORK button.  
ꢂ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Using the Viewer  
Making the Most out of the Viewer Function  
Features  
The Viewer feature allows you to view slides or movie files stored on a USB memory on the projector, or a shared  
folder in a computer connected to the network.  
The VIEWER has the following features.  
Five graphic formats are supported: JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, and Index*¹  
*¹: Index is a file format created using ArcSoft MediaImpression or Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 contained on the attached NEC  
User Supportware 6 CD-ROM.  
Even if no computer is available, presentations can be conducted simply with the projector. This feature is con-  
venient for holding presentations at meetings and in offices.  
Image and movie file stored in a shared folder in a computer connected to a network can be projected.  
The computer with “Media Sharing” of Windows Media Player 11 turned on can be used as a media server.  
Slides can be easily switched automatically. This is convenient for projecting advertisement.  
A VIEWER-supported image stored on the USB memory can be used as a background logo.  
Images taken on digital cameras can be played back (JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF).  
Movie file can be projected on to the screen while it is being played back.  
Supported movie files are MPG (MPEG2) and WMV.  
Supported video formats are MPEG2 MP@ML*² and Windows Media Video 9.  
Supported audio formats are MPEG-1 Layer 1, MPEG-1 Layer 2, MPEG-1 Layer 3, and Windows Media Audio 9  
Standard.  
*²: MPEG2 MP@ML is a standard format for DVD and DTV applications.  
NOTE:  
• Use commercially available USB memory devices.  
• We do not warrant that the USB port of the projector will support all USB memory devices in the market.  
• The projector does not support NTFS formatted USB memory device.  
Be sure to use a USB memory device formatted with the FAT32, FAT16 or FAT file system.  
To format your USB memory device in your computer, refer to the document or help file that comes with your Windows.  
File restrictions during Viewer playback  
Supported graphic formats  
Format  
JPEG  
BMP  
PNG  
GIF  
File name extension  
.jpg, .jpe, .jpeg  
.bmp  
.png  
.gif  
index  
.idx  
* If an unsupported image is selected, the icon will be displayed.  
NOTE:  
• An image with higher than 4000 pixels in width or height cannot be displayed.  
α
• Progressive JPEG, Interlaced GIF, animation GIF, interlaced PNG, channel PNG are not supported.  
ꢂ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Using the Viewer  
Supported movie files  
Compress/expand method  
MPEG2 MP@ML  
Windows Media Video 9  
File name extension  
.mpg  
.wmv  
NOTE:  
• A movie file with display size greater than 720 × 576 pixels (width × height) cannot be played back.  
• Movie files converted by using the video/audio format which is not supported by this projector cannot be played back.  
In this case, there will be no icon to show that playback is not possible.  
• Movie files with Linear PCM, AC-3, WMA Pro, or WMA Lossless audio format cannot be played back.  
• Files with Digital Rights Management(DRM) protection cannot be played back.  
• Some of the movie files that meet the above requirements may not be played back.  
TIP: WMV format video file will be displayed in an aspect ratio of 1 to 1 independently of its original aspect ratio.  
Notices on image display and movie file playback  
Files from a shared folder or media server may not be projected if security or antivirus software is installed on  
your computer.  
Open the following firewall ports:  
-
Media server  
Port number  
1900  
Protocol  
UDP  
2869  
TCP  
10243  
TCP  
10280-10284  
UDP  
-
Shared folder  
Port number  
137  
138  
139  
445  
Protocol  
UDP/TCP  
UDP/TCP  
UDP/TCP  
UDP/TCP  
Set your computer for sharing and security to grant access to files in the shared folder and set your security or  
antivirus software to grant access to files in the shared folder. Consult your network administrator for more infor-  
mation.  
Movie files in the shared folder or the media server may not be played back correctly depending on your network  
environment or the bit rate of your file.  
Saving data to a USB memory device  
There are two ways to save your data to a USB memory device.  
Using ArcSoft MediaImpression  
Install ArcSoft MediaImpression from the supplied User Supportware 6 CD-ROM to your computer. Use ArcSoft  
MediaImpression to create graphic data on your computer and save the files to a USB memory device.  
Files created on ArcSoft MediaImpression/Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 are index format and are stored in [Presentation]  
folder.  
For more details about ArcSoft MediaImpression, see the supplied “Wired and Wireless Network Setup Guide”, “Basic  
Operation Guide (PDF)” on the User Supportware 6 CD-ROM and the help file of ArcSoft MediaImpression.  
Using Windows Explorer to save files  
Supported graphic file formats are JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, Index. Supported movie file formats are MPG and WMV.  
ꢂꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Using the Viewer  
Operating the Viewer Function from the Projector (playback)  
This section describes the operation for showing slides created or movie files.  
Projecting slides (Viewer)  
Preparation: Store JPEG or BMP files (JPEG, BMP, non-interlaced GIF or non-interlaced PNG files) in a USB mem-  
ory inserted into your PC.  
To start the Viewer, press the SOURCE button on the cabinet to select [VIEWER]. ( page 25)  
Viewer screen will be displayed. (A slide will be displayed at the factory default.)  
You can use the VIEWER button on the remote control to select [VIEWER].  
Operating Viewer Menu  
1. Insert a USB memory into the USB port of the projector.  
The USB indicator lights.  
2. Press the VIEWER button on the remote control or select the [VIEWER] from the source list.  
An image stored in the USB memory will be displayed.  
NOTE: When [SHOW THUMBNAILS] is turned on in the OPTIONS menu, the thumbnail screen will be displayed. ( page 70)  
NOTE: Pressing the EXIT button during slide playback will display the thumbnail screen.  
Slide and Thumbnail  
When VIEWER is selected, one of the two screens is displayed.  
One is a slide and the other is a thumbnail screen.  
[SLIDE]  
[THUMBNAILS]  
TIP: To switch from [SLIDE] to [THUMBNAILS], press the EXIT button.  
The Control Bar  
Pressing the MENU button during slide playback will display the control bar which allows you to operate a slide-  
show. Press the EXIT button to close the control bar.  
The control bar contains the following icon buttons:  
Selects the currently  
displayed image for your  
Advances to the next image. background logo.  
Quits slide playback and  
then returns to the thumb-  
nail screen.  
Returns to the pre-  
vious image.  
Rotates the image 90 degrees  
counterclockwise.  
Plays back slides.  
Rotates the image 90 degrees  
clockwise.  
Stops Auto Play while you  
are playing back slides.  
ꢂꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Using the Viewer  
Projecting a movie file  
Preparation: Store MPG files in a USB memory inserted into your PC.  
To display a movie file:  
1. Press the SOURCE button to select [VIEWER].  
Viewer screen will be displayed. (A slide will be displayed at the factory default.)  
2. Select a movie file icon from [THUMBNAILS] screen and press the ENTER button.  
[THUMBNAILS]  
Movie icon  
TIP: To return from the movie screen to [THUMBNAILS], press the EXIT button.  
NOTE:  
• If you select an unsupported file, an error message will be displayed and the VIEWER will return to the thumbnail screen.  
• If you change a source during playback of a movie file, the playback will stop.  
• If you start playing back a movie file with the projector connected to the network, the network will be disconnected.  
• If you use a USB memory device which has a slow reading speed, the movie file may not play back correctly.  
• If you remove or insert the USB memory device during playback of a movie file, an error may occur with the VIEWER.  
• The network will be disconnected if a movie file starts playing back by using “Image Express Utility”, “Desktop Control Utility”,  
“Network Projector” and “Remote Desktop Connection”.  
Remote control button operation when a movie is played back:  
ENTER.................... Press.this.button.during.playback.to.pause.playback..Press.this.button.when.the.movie.is.paused.to.re-  
sume.playback.  
Press.this.button.during.fast-forward.or.rewind.to.return.to.playback.  
Press.this.button.when.the.movie.is.stopped.to.start.playback.  
EXIT........................ Press.this.button.to.return.to.the.thumbnail.screen.  
The Control Bar  
Pressing the MENU button during playback will display the control bar which allows you to operate movie files.  
Press the EXIT button to close the control bar.  
The control bar contains the following icon buttons:  
Fast-forward the movie. When fastfor-  
wardingis complete, playback stops.  
Quits playback and then  
returns to the thumbnail  
screen.  
Rewind the movie. When rewind-  
ing is complete, the movie auto-  
matically begins playback.  
Stops playback of the movie.  
Starts playback or  
pauses playback of  
the movie.  
ꢂ8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Using the Viewer  
Thumbnail screen  
List of folders  
Scroll bar  
Highlight  
Thumbnail/file name  
Cursor (yellow)  
Information  
Number of files  
NOTE:  
• The icon [ ] shows that the file cannot be displayed in the thumbnail screen.  
• The “MPG” or “WMV” icon shows that the movie file cannot be displayed in the thumbnail screen.  
Highlight....................................Indicates.the.selected.folder.or.drive.  
List.of.folders.............................Indicates.folders.contained.on.a.USB.memory.  
Information................................Indicates.information.of.the.selected.file.or.folder.  
Folder:.folder.name,.number.of.files,.creation.date.(month/day/year),.creation.time.(hour:minute:  
second).  
File:.file.name,.slide.number/number.of.displayable.slides.in.a.folder,.creation.date*¹.(month/day/  
year),.creation.time*².(hour:minute:second),.file.size.  
Number.of.files..........................Indicates.number.of.displayable.slides.in.the.selected.folder..The.maximum.number.of.images.  
recognized.as.slides.within.one.directory.is.about.250.  
Thumbnail/file.name..................Indicates.thumbnails.and.names.contained.in.a.folder.  
Cursor........................................Indicates.the.selected.slide.  
Scroll.bar...................................Used.to.view.folders.or.files.not.visible.in.the.window.  
NOTE:  
*¹ Creation time of a file in a media server will not be shown.  
*² Creation date may not be shown in a file in a media server.  
ꢂ9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Using the Viewer  
Setting Option for Viewer  
PLAY MODE:  
MANUAL................. Views.a.slide.manually.when.the.Viewer.source.is.selected.  
AUTO...................... Plays.back.slides.automatically.when.the.Viewer.source.is.selected.  
NOTE: This option setting is required to play slides automatically or manually which were created with the “Output Viewer”  
feature of ArcSoft MediaImpression.  
INTERVAL:  
Specifies interval time between 5 and 300 seconds.  
START:  
Specifies start screen for images in the USB memory when the Viewer source is selected. Two options can be  
selected: Slide or Thumbnails  
When [VIEWER] is selected from the SOURCE menu, the thumbnail screen will always be displayed if image  
files are not available in the USB memory.  
NOTE: If a USB memory is not inserted into the projector, the [THUMBNAILS] screen will always be displayed at the time of  
start.  
SHOW THUMBNAILS:  
Selecting the Viewer source will display a list of thumbnails of graphic files stored in the USB memory when [ON]  
is selected. Selecting the Viewer source will display a list of icons of graphic files stored in the USB memory  
when [OFF] is selected.  
SORT:  
Rearranges the slides or thumbnails by name, extension, date or size.  
NOTE: This setting is not available for the following folders:  
*Folders created with the “Output Viewer” feature of ArcSoft MediaImpression or with Viewer PPT Converter 3.0  
MOVING PICTURE SIZE:  
ORIGINAL............... Displays.the.movie.file.in.its.original.resolution.  
FULL....................... Displays.the.movie.file.to.fill.the.screen.with.its.original.aspect.ratio.maintained.  
MOVING PICTURE REPEAT:  
OFF......................... When.the.movie.reaches.its.end,.its.playback.will.stop.  
ON.......................... When.the.movie.reaches.its.end,.its.playback.will.start.again.from.the.beginning.  
OK/CANCEL:  
To close the Options menu with saving changes, select [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
To close the Options menu without saving changes, select [CANCEL] and press the ENTER button.  
NOTE:  
• The [PLAY MODE], [START], [SHOW THUMBNAILS], and [SORT](for SLIDE screen) options will work for graphic files only.  
• The [MOVING PICTURE SIZE] and [MOVING PICTURE REPEAT] options will work for movie files only.  
ꢃ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Using the Viewer  
THUMBNAILS menu  
The THUMBNAILS menu will appear when you press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector  
cabinet. To close the THUMBNAILS menu, press the EXIT button.  
The THUMBNAILS menu includes the following commands:  
PLAY................... Plays.back.automatically.or.manually.depending.on.the.setting.in.Options..This.allows.you.to.move.on.to.  
the.next.slide.when.[MANUAL].is.selected.in.the.[PLAY.MODE].  
LOGO.................. Replace.the.default.background.logo.with.another.logo.in.JPEG,.BMP,.non-interlaced.GIF.or.non-inter-  
laced.PNG.format.  
OPTIONS............. Displays.the.Viewer.setting.options.  
REFRESH............ Reflects.the.new.information.in.the.list.of.folders.  
CONNECT............ Connects.a.shared.folder.to.the.NETWORK.drive.  
DISCONNECT...... Disconnects.the.share.folder.from.the.NETWORK.drive.  
Exiting Viewer  
To exit Viewer, switch to another input such as COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER 2, COMPUTER 3, COMPONENT,  
VIDEO, S-VIDEO or NETWORK.  
* To switch to another input, there are two ways:  
Press the COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER 2, COMPUTER 3, COMPONENT, VIDEO, S-VIDEO or NETWORK  
button on the remote control.  
Press the MENU button on the remote control to display the Viewer menu. Press the MENU button again to  
display the main menu and select the input from the [SOURCE] submenu.  
With this function it is possible to switch directly to a slide when the picture of a VCR or computer is being projected.  
Example: When conducting presentations using a combination of slides and moving pictures from a VCR, etc., it is  
possible to switch from a Viewer slide to the video picture then back to the Viewer slide simply by using the VIEWER  
button.  
NOTE: Even if you switch the current Viewer source to another source, the current slide is retained. When you return back to the  
Viewer, you will get the slide that has been retained.  
ꢃꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Using the Viewer  
Changing Background Logo  
You can change the default background logo using the Viewer feature.  
NOTE: File size must be 256KB or less. Maximum file resolution is 1024 × 768 for NP3250/NP2250/NP1250 and 1280 × 800 for  
NP3250W. File formats other than JPEG, BMP, non-interlaced GIF or non-interlaced PNG are not available.  
Preparation: Store JPEG or BMP files (JPEG, BMP, non-interlaced GIF or non-interlaced PNG files) in a USB  
memory into the projector’s USB port.  
NOTE: To change highlight from the Thumbnails screen (right window) to a directory tree (left window), press the EXIT button. To  
return highlight to the Thumbnails screen, press the ENTER button.  
1. Use the SELECT  
button to select a file (slide) for your background logo when displaying the  
  
Thumbnail screen.  
2. Press the MENU button to display the THUMBNAILS menu.  
3. Use the SELECT button to select [LOGO] and then press the ENTER button.  
A confirmation dialog box will be displayed.  
4. Use the SELECT button to select [YES] and press the ENTER button. This completes changing a logo  
for the background.  
*
Once you have changed the background from the default “NEC Projector” image (jpg) to another, you cannot  
return the logo to background even by using [RESET]. To put the default “NEC Projector” image (jpg) back in the  
background logo, repeat the above steps.  
The default “NEC Projector” image (jpg) file is included on the supplied User Supportware 6 CD-ROM (NP3250/  
NP2250/NP1250: /Logo/necpj_bbwx.jpg and NP3250W: necpj_bbwx.jpg).  
Image files stored on the shared folder and the media server cannot be used as background logo.  
ꢃꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Using the Viewer  
Projecting data from shared folder (Viewer)  
LAN  
Shared folder  
Wireless LAN  
Projector  
Shared folder  
Preparation  
For projector: Connect the projector to the network.  
For computer: Place files to be projected in a shared folder and note the folder’s path. Memorize or write down the  
path for later use.  
For sharing a folder, refer to your user guide or help file accompanied with your Windows computer.  
Use a keyboard to give a name to the shared folder in alphanumeric characters.  
To connect the shared folder beyond the subnet, set [WINS CONFIGURATION] in [NETWORK SETTINGS] from  
the menu.  
Digital signature (SMB signature) is not supported.  
Connecting the projector to the shared folder  
1. Press the VIEWER button on the remote control.  
The VIEWER will start.  
Another way to start the VIEWER is to press the SOURCE button a few times on the projector cabinet. (  
page 25)  
ꢃ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Using the Viewer  
2. Select “NETWORK” on the left side of the thumbnail screen and press the MENU button.  
The thumbnail menu will be displayed.  
Unavailable items are shown in gray.  
To close the thumbnail screen, press the EXIT button.  
3. Select [CONNECT] from the thumbnail menu and press the ENTER button.  
The [CONNECT TO SHARED FOLDER] dialog box will be displayed.  
4. Enter the path for the shared folder. Select [CONNECT] and press the ENTER button.  
The shared folder will be displayed under “NETWORK” on the thumbnail screen. Up to four shared folders can be  
added to the “NETWORK”.  
When authentication is required at the time of connecting to the shared folder, the [AUTHENTICATION] dialog  
box will be displayed. Enter appropriate information and select [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
NOTE: The maximum length of a path of the shared folder must be 15 alphanumeric characters for computer name and 22 alpha-  
numeric characters for folder name.  
Path of a shared folder:  
\\computer name\folder name  
ꢃ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Using the Viewer  
Reflecting changes of the shared folder on the thumbnail screen.  
If changes to the shared folder are made after the projector is connected, use this feature to display the updated  
information on the thumbnail screen.  
1. Press the MENU button while the thumbnail screen is displayed.  
The thumbnail menu will be displayed.  
Unavailable items are shown in gray.  
To close the thumbnail screen, press the EXIT button.  
2. Select [REFRESH] from the thumbnail menu and press the ENTER button.  
The thumbnail information will be updated.  
See “Operating the Viewer Function from the Projector (playback)” for more information. ( page 67)  
ꢃ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Using the Viewer  
Disconnecting the shared folder from the projector  
1. Select a shared folder under “NETWORK” and press the MENU button.  
The thumbnail menu will be displayed.  
Unavailable items are shown in gray.  
To close the thumbnail screen, press the EXIT button.  
2. Select [DISCONNECT] from the thumbnail menu and press the ENTER button.  
The shared folder will be disconnected from “NETWORK”.  
TIP:  
• If you have done the above operation, all the shared folders will be disconnected.  
• Shared folder connection history  
Connection history for the shared folder will be recorded. If the projector is restarted without disconnecting the shared folder,  
the [?] mark will be added to the folder in the thumbnail screen.  
• Up to four folders including the shared folder and history can be displayed under the “NETWORK” drive.  
When the folder with the [?] mark is highlighted and [CONNECT] is selected, typing the path name for the shared folder can be  
skipped. The folder with the [?] mark can be deleted by selecting [DISCONNECT].  
ꢃꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Using the Viewer  
Projecting data from media server (Viewer)  
Media server  
LAN  
Wireless LAN  
Media server  
Projector  
Media server  
Preparation  
For projector: Connect the projector to the network.  
For computer: Prepare image files or movie files to be projected, and set up “Media Sharing” in Windows Media  
Player 11.  
NOTE:  
• Both the projector and the media server must be on the same subnet. Connecting to the media server beyond the subnet is not  
possible.  
• Types of images and movies which can be shared may vary depending on Windows version.  
Setting up “Media Sharing” in Windows Media Player 11  
1. Start Windows Media Player 11.  
2. Select “Media Sharing” from “Library”.  
The “Media Sharing” dialog box will be displayed.  
ꢃꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Using the Viewer  
3. Select “Share my media” check box, and then select OK.  
A list of accessible devices will be displayed.  
4. Select “NP3250 Series” and then “Allow”.  
A check mark will be added to the “NP3250 Series” icon.  
The “NP3250 Series” is a projector name specified in [NETWORK SETTINGS].  
5. Select “OK”.  
This will make pictures and video in “Library” available from the projector.  
ꢃ8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Using the Viewer  
Connecting the projector to the media server  
Press the VIEWER button on the remote control.  
The VIEWER will start.  
Another way to start the VIEWER is to press the SOURCE button a few times on the projector cabinet. ( page  
25)  
This will start searching for a computer with “media sharing” enabled in the network and add it to the “Media  
server” of the thumbnail screen.  
Another way to do this is to point the cursor to “Media server” and select [REFRESH] from the thumbnail menu  
and press the ENTER button.  
NOTE:  
• Up to four accessible media servers can be automatically searched and displayed. The fifth device or later cannot be displayed.  
See “Operating the Viewer Function from the Projector (playback)” for more information. ( page 67)  
ꢃ9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Using the Menus  
1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the menu.  
,
NOTE: The commands such as  ENTER, EXIT in the bottom show available buttons for your operation.  
2. Press the SELECT  
buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu.  
  
3. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to highlight the top item or the  
first tab.  
4. Use the SELECT  
to adjust or set.  
buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want  
  
You can use the SELECT  
want.  
buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the tab you  
  
5. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu window.  
6. Adjust the level or turn the selected item on or off by using the SELECT  
control or the projector cabinet.  
buttons on the remote  
  
Changes are stored until you adjust it again.  
7. Repeat steps 2 -6 to adjust an additional item, or press the EXIT button on the remote control or the pro-  
jector cabinet to quit the menu display.  
NOTE: When a menu or message is displayed, several lines of information may be lost, depending on the signal or settings.  
8. Press the MENU button to close the menu.  
To return to the previous menu, press the EXIT button.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Using ADVANCED menu and BASIC menu  
The projector has two menu modes: the ADVANCED menu and the BASIC menu.  
ADVANCED.menu... This.is.the.menu.that.contains.all.the.available.menus.and.commands..Users.with.an.ADMINISTRAOR.or.  
ADVANCED.account.can.access.the.ADVANCED.menu.  
BASIC.menu........... This.is.the.basic.menu.that.contains.minimum.essentials.of.menus.and.commands..Users.with.a.BASIC.  
account.can.access.the.BASIC.menu.  
See page 50 for settings available to ADVANCED and BASIC menus.  
NOTE:  
• A user with an ADMINISTRATOR account that has no password set is registered at the factory.  
This will allow the user to access the ACCOUNT items without password entry.  
• When using your USB mouse, click each number or alphabet.  
BS: Delete the character before the cursor or highlight.  
]
OK/[ : Confirm the keyword and close the Software keyboard.  
Entering alphanumeric characters by using Software Keyboard  
[IP.ADDRESS,.PASSWORD].  
[USER.NAME,.PROJECTOR.NAME].  
[PASSWORD.OR.KEYWORD]  
1.to.0.and.Characters  
When using the remote control:  
............................... Use.to.type.in.password.or.keyword.  
1. Press the MENU, AUTO ADJ, SELECT , SE-  
LECT , SELECT or SELECT button to se-  
MODE..................... Selects.one.of.three.modes.for.num-  
lect a character in the row.  
bers,.alphabet.and.special.charac-  
ters.  
Example: To enter “C”, press the SELECT  
ton.  
but-  
SP........................... Inserts.a.space  
2. Press the MENU, AUTO ADJ, SELECT , SE-  
BS........................... Deletes.one.character.backward  
<<........................... Returns.to.the.previous  
>>........................... Advances.to.the.next  
OK........................... Executes.the.selection  
CANCEL.................. Cancels.the.selection  
LECT , SELECT or SELECT button to se-  
lect a character in the column.  
Example: To enter “C”, press the MENU button.  
EXIT........................ Deletes.a.character.  
ENTER.................... Makes.your.input.take.effect.and.  
closes.the.input.screen.  
When using the mouse:  
Point to a character and click it.  
[BS]........................ Deletes.a.character.  
[
]......................... Makes.your.input.take.effect.and.  
closes.the.input.screen.  
8ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Basic menu items are indicated by  
shaded area.  
Menu tree  
Factory default settings are indi-  
cated by the gray shaded area.  
Menu  
Item  
SOURCE.  
.
COMPUTER.1,.COMPUTER.2,.COMPUTER.3,.COMPONENT,.VIDEO,.S-VIDEO,.VIEWER,.NETWORK,.ENTRY.LIST  
ADJUST.  
PICTURE.  
MODE.  
STANDARD,.PROFESSIONAL  
1.to.7  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PRESET.  
.
.
DETAIL.SETTINGS  
.
GENERAL.  
REFERENCE.  
HIGH-BRIGHT,.PRESENTATION,.VIDEO,.  
MOVIE,.GRAPHIC,.sRGB,.DICOM.SIM.  
DYNAMIC,.NATURAL,.BLACK.DETAIL  
5000,.6500,.7800,.8500,.9300,.10500  
CONTRAST.RGB,.BRIGHTNESS.RGB.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..  
.
.
.
..  
GAMMA.CORRECTION.  
.
.
..  
COLOR.TEMPERATURE.  
.
.
WHITE.BALANCE. .  
.
CONTRAST.  
BRIGHTNESS.  
SHARPNESS  
COLOR.  
HUE.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RESET  
.
IMAGE.OPTIONS. CLOCK  
.
.
PHASE  
.
.
HORIZONTAL.POSITION  
VERTICAL.POSITION  
OVERSCAN.  
.
.
.
.
0%,.5%,.10%  
.
.
ASPECT.RATIO.  
.
RGB.  
4:3,.5:4,.16:9,.16:10,.15:9  
.
.
4:3.SCREEN.(COMPONENT)/VIDEO/S-VIDEO  
.
4:3,.LETTERBOX,.WIDE.SCREEN,.ZOOM  
.
.
.
WIDE.SCREEN.(COMPONENT)/VIDEO/S-VIDEO. 4:3.WINDOW,.LETTERBOX,.WIDE.SCREEN,.4:3.FILL  
.
.
RESOLUTION.  
NOISE.REDUCTION.  
DEINTERLACE.  
3D.Y/C.SEPARATION.  
CONTRAST.ENHANCEMENT  
.
AUTO,.NATIVE  
.
VIDEO.  
RANDOM.NR,.MOSQUITO.NR,.BLOCK.NR  
AUTO,.VIDEO,.FILM  
OFF,.ON  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
AUDIO.  
VOLUME,.BASS,.TREBLE,.BALANCE,.3D.SURROUND.(OFF,.ON)  
HORIZONTAL,.VERTICAL  
SETUP.  
BASIC.  
KEYSTONE.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CORNERSTONE.  
.
PIP/SIDE.BY.SIDE  
.
MODE,.POSITION,.SOURCE.  
.
WALL.COLOR.  
OFF,.WHITEBOARD,.BLACKBOARD,.BLACKBOARD.(GRAY),.LIGHT.YELLOW,.  
LIGHT.GREEN,.LIGHT.BLUE,.SKY.BLUE,.LIGHT.ROSE,.PINK  
NORMAL,.ECO  
.
.
.
LAMP.MODE.  
OFF.TIMER.  
TOOLS.  
LOGOFF  
LANGUAGE.  
.
.
OFF,.0:30,.1:00,.2:00,.4:00,.8:00,.12:00,.16:00  
.
PROGRAM.TIMER,.CORNERSTONE,.ENTRY.LIST,.[DATE,.TIME.PRESET],.[MOUSE],.[HELP]  
.
.
ENGLISH,.DEUTSCH,.FRANÇAIS,.ITALIANO,.ESPAÑOL,.SVENSKA,.SUOMI,.NORSK,  
.
NEDERLANDS,.TÜRKÇE,.POLSKI,.  
.,.  
.,.MAGYAR,.  
.
.
PORTUGUÊS,.  
COLOR,.MONOCHROME  
OFF,.ON  
.,.  
.,.DANSK,.  
.,.  
.,.  
MENU.  
COLOR.SELECT.  
SOURCE.DISPLAY.  
MESSAGE.DISPLAY.  
TIME.DISPLAY.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
OFF,.ON  
OFF,.ON  
ID.DISPLAY.  
OFF,.ON  
MENU.DISPLAY.TIME.  
BACKGROUND.  
MANUAL,.AUTO.5.SEC,.AUTO.15.SEC,.AUTO.45.SEC  
BLUE,.BLACK,.LOGO  
FILTER.MESSAGE.  
OFF,.100[H],.200[H],.500[H],.1000[H]  
8ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Menu  
Item  
SETUP.  
INSTALLATION(1). ORIENTATION.  
DESKTOP.FRONT,.CEILING.REAR,.DESKTOP.REAR,.CEILING.FRONT  
.
.
.
.
.
.
SCREEN.  
GEOMETRIC.CORRECTION.  
MULTI-SCREEN.COMP... MODE,CONTRAST,BRIGHTNESS  
SCREEN.TYPE:.4:3.SCREEN,.WIDE.SCREEN*¹./.POSITION*²  
OFF,.1,.2,.3  
.
INSTALLATION(2). NETWORK.SETTINGS.  
GENERAL:..  
PROJECTOR.NAME,.WIRED.LAN,.WIRELESS.LAN  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.WIRED:..  
.
.WIRELESS:.  
.
PROFILES,.DHCP,.IP.ADDRESS,.SUBNET.MASK,.GATEWAY,.  
.
DOMAIN:..  
MAIL:..  
.
.
.
COMMUNICATION.SPEED.4800bps,.9600bps,.19200bps,.38400bps  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SECURITY.SETTINGS.  
.
REMOTE.SENSOR.  
CONTROL.ID.  
AUTO.ADJUST.  
CONTROL.PANEL.LOCK,.BACKGROUND.LOCK,.ACCOUNT.LOCK,.ACCOUNT,.  
SECURITY,.PJLink,.HTTP.SERVER  
FRONT./.BACK,.FRONT,.BACK  
CONTROL.ID.NUMBER,.CONTROL.ID  
OFF,.NORMAL,.FINE  
.
OPTIONS.  
.
.
AUTO.POWER.ON(AC). OFF,.ON  
.
.
AUTO.POWER.ON(COMP1/2).OFF,.COMPUTER.1,.COMPUTER.2  
.
.
.
.
AUTO.POWER.OFF.  
FAN.MODE.  
OFF,.0:05,.0:10,.0:20,.0:30  
AUTO,.HIGH,.HIGH.ALTITUDE  
.
.
DEFAULT.SOURCE.SELECT. LAST,.AUTO,.COMPUTER1,.COMPUTER2,.COMPUTER3,.COMPONENT,.VIDEO,  
.
.
.
S-VIDEO,.VIEWER,.NETWORK  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SIGNAL.SELECT.  
.
COLOR.SYSTEM.  
OUT.TERMINAL.  
COMPUTER1.  
COMPUTER2.  
VIDEO,.S-VIDEO  
RGB/COMPONENT,.RGB,.COMPONENT  
RGB/COMPONENT,.RGB,.COMPONENT  
LAST,.COMPUTER1,.COMPUTER2,.COMPONENT  
INFO..  
.
.
.
USAGE.TIME.  
SOURCE.(1).  
SOURCE.(2).  
WIRED.LAN.  
WIRELESS.LAN.(1  
LAMP.LIFE.REMAINING,.LAMP.HOURS.USED,.FILTER.HOURS.USED  
INPUT.TERMINAL,.SIGNAL.TYPE,.VIDEO.TYPE,.SOURCE.NAME,.ENTRY.NO.  
HORIZONTAL.FREQUENCY,.VERTICAL.FREQUENCY,.SYNC.TYPE,.SYNC.POLARITY,.SCAN.TYPE  
IP.ADDRESS,.SUBNET.MASK,.GATEWAY,.MAC.ADDRESS  
.
)
. IP.ADDRESS,.SUBNET.MASK,.GATEWAY,.MAC.ADDRESS,.AUTHENTICATION*³  
.
.
.
WIRELESS.LAN.(2). SSID,.NETWORK.TYPE,.WEP/WPA,.CHANNEL,.SIGNAL.LEVEL  
VERSION.(1).  
PRODUCT,.SERIAL.NUMBER,.LAN.UNIT.TYPE,.LAN.UNIT.VERSION,.CONTROL.ID*4  
FIRMWARE,.DATA,.FIRMWARE2,.DATA2  
VERSION.(2).  
.
RESET.  
CURRENT.SIGNAL,.ALL.DATA,.ALL.DATA.(INCLUDING.ENTRY.LIST),.CLEAR.LAMP.HOURS,.CLEAR.FILTER.HOURS  
NOTE:  
*1 Default SCREEN TYPE is 4:3 SCREEN for NP3250/NP2250/NP1250 and WIDE SCREEN for NP3250W.  
*2 POSITION is not available with NP3250W.  
*3 The current authentication will be displayed when WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP is selected for [SECURITY TYPE].  
*4 The current control ID will be displayed when [CONTROL ID] is turned on.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Menu Elements  
Tab  
Slide bar  
Highlight  
Available buttons  
Currently selected  
user  
Currently selected  
source  
Help button  
Close button  
Solid triangle  
Radio button  
Check box  
Return symbol  
OK button  
Cancel button  
Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements:  
Highlight................. Indicates.the.selected.menu.or.item..  
Solid.triangle.......... Indicates.further.choices.are.available..A.highlighted.triangle.indicates.the.item.is.active..  
Tab.......................... Indicates.a.group.of.features.in.a.dialog.box..Selecting.on.any.tab.brings.its.page.to.the.front.  
Radio.button........... Use.this.round.button.to.select.an.option.in.a.dialog.box.  
Check.box............... Place.a.checkmark.in.the.square.box.to.turn.the.option.On..  
Slide.bar................. Indicates.settings.or.the.direction.of.adjustment.  
OK.button............... Press.to.confirm.your.setting..You.will.return.to.the.previous.menu.  
Cancel.button.......... Press.to.cancel.your.setting..You.will.return.to.the.previous.menu.  
Close.button........... Click.to.close.the.window.and.saving.changes.(USB.mouse.only).  
Help.button............. Indicates.that.help.about.that.feature.is.available.(USB.mouse.only)..Press.the.HELP.button.on.the.remote.  
control.to.display.help.  
Return.symbol........ Indicates.the.software.keyboard.is.available.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Menu Descriptions & Functions [SOURCE]  
COMPUTER 1 and 2  
Selects the computer connected to your COMPUTER 1 or COMPUTER 2 input connector signal.  
NOTE:  
• When the component input signal is connected to the COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER 2 or COMPUTER 3, select [COMPUTER 1],  
[COMPUTER 2] or [COMPUTER 3] respectively.  
• An optional component cable (Component V or ADP-CV1E cable) is needed for a component signal.  
COMPUTER 3 (RGB Digital)  
Selects the computer connected to your COMPUTER 3 (DVI-D) connector.  
COMPONENT  
Selects what is connected to your COMPONENT IN (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr).  
VIDEO  
Selects what is connected to your VIDEO input-VCR, laser disc player, DVD player or document camera.  
S-VIDEO  
Selects what is connected to your S-VIDEO input-VCR, DVD player, or laser disc player.  
NOTE: A frame may freeze for a brief period of time when a video is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind with a Video or  
S-Video source.  
VIEWER  
This feature enables you to make presentations using a USB memory that contains captured images and slides  
created with the ArcSoft MediaImpression for NEC contained on the CD-ROM. See the supplied NEC Wired and  
Wireless Network Setup Guide for installing the ArcSoft MediaImpression for NEC.  
(
page 65)  
NETWORK  
Selects a signal from the LAN port (RJ-45) or the installed USB wireless LAN unit.  
When a source connected on a network is not made settings, the [NETWORK] menu will be displayed. ( page  
110)  
ENTRY LIST  
Displays a list of signals. See the following pages.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[ENTRY LIST]  
Using the Entry List  
When any source adjustments are made, the adjustments are automatically registered in the Entry List. The (adjust-  
ment values of) registered signals can be loaded from the Entry List whenever necessary.  
However, only up to 100 patterns can be registered in the Entry List. When 100 patterns have been registered in the  
Entry List, an error message is then displayed and no additional patterns can be registered. You should thus delete  
(adjustment values of) signals that are no longer needed.  
Entering the Currently Projected Signal into the Entry List  
1. Display the Entry List.  
2. Use the SELECT or button on your remote control or the projector cabinet to select any number.  
3. Use the SELECT button to select [STORE] and press the ENTER button.  
You can edit signals on the [ENTRY LIST].  
LOAD...................... Enables.you.to.select.a.signal.from.the.list.  
STORE.................... Enables.you.to.store.the.currently.projected.signal.  
CUT......................... Enables.you.to.remove.a.selected.signal.from.the.list.and.place.it.on.the.“clipboard”.in.the.projector.  
COPY...................... Enables.you.to.copy.a.selected.signal.from.the.list.and.place.it.on.the.“clipboard”.in.the.projector.  
PASTE..................... Enables.you.to.paste.the.signal.placed.on.the.“clipboard”.to.any.other.line.of.the.list.  
EDIT........................ Enables.you.to.change.SOURCE.NAME,.INPUT.TERMINAL,.LOCK,.and.SKIP.  
8ꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
SOURCE NAME:  
Enter.a.signal.name..Up.to.18.alphanumeric.characters.can.be.used.  
INPUT TERMINAL:  
Change.the.input.terminal.  
LOCK:  
Set.so.that.the.selected.signal.cannot.be.deleted.when.[ALL.DELETE].is.executed..After.executing.[LOCK],.  
the.changes.cannot.be.saved.  
SKIP:  
Set.so.that.the.selected.signal.will.be.skipped.during.auto.search.  
When.complete,.select.OK.and.press.ENTER..To.exit.without.storing.the.setting,.select.Cancel..Select.  
[SOURCE.NAME].and.press.ENTER.to.display.the.Source.Name.Edit.window..You.can.change.source.  
name.on.this.window..Press. .to.display.the.software.keyboard,.which.you.can.enter.alphanumeric.  
characters..  
ALL.DELETE............ This.feature.enables.you.to.delete.all.the.registered.signals.in.the.Entry.List.  
PAGE.UP/.PAGE.DOWN... Enables.you.to.go.to.the.next.page.or.the.previous.page.  
The following buttons are not available for the currently projecting signals:  
1) The CUT and PASTE buttons on the [ENTRY LIST] screen  
2) The INPUT TERMINAL button on the [EDIT] screen  
NOTE: When all the signals in the [ENTRY LIST] are deleted, the currently projected signal will be also deleted except locked sig-  
nals.  
8ꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST]  
[PICTURE]  
[MODE]  
This function allows you to determine how to save settings for [DETAIL SETTINGS] of [PRESET] for each input.  
STANDARD............. Saves.settings.for.each.item.of.[PRESET].(Preset.1.through.7)  
PROFESSIONAL...... Saves.all.the.settings.of.[PICTURE].for.each.input..  
[PRESET]  
This option allows you to adjust neutral tint for yellow, cyan or magenta. There are seven factory presets optimized  
for various types of images, you can set user adjustable settings.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[DETAIL SETTINGS]  
This will provide you with two pages of menus that provide more detailed settings.  
[GENERAL]  
Selecting Reference Setting [REFERENCE]  
This feature allows you to use color correction or gamma values as reference data to optimize for various types  
of images.You can select one of the following seven settings.  
HIGH-BRIGHT..... Recommended.for.use.in.a.brightly.lit.room.  
PRESENTATION.. Recommended.for.making.a.presentation.using.a.PowerPoint.file.  
VIDEO................. Recommended.for.typical.TV.program.viewing.  
MOVIE................. Recommended.for.movies.  
GRAPHIC............ Recommended.for.graphics.  
sRGB................... Standard.color.values.  
DICOM.SIM......... Recommended.for.DICOM.simulation.format.  
NOTE:  
• The DICOM SIM option is for training/reference only and should not be used for actual diagnosis.  
• DICOM stands for Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine. It is a standard developed by the American College of  
Radiology (ACR) and the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).  
The standard specifies how digital image data can be moved from system to system.  
Selecting Gamma Correction Mode [GAMMA CORRECTION]  
Each mode is recommended for:  
DYNAMIC............ Creates.a.high-contrast.picture.  
NATURAL............ Natural.reproduction.of.the.picture.  
BLACK.DETAIL.... Emphasizes.detail.in.dark.areas.of.the.picture.  
Adjusting Color Temperature [COLOR TEMPERATURE]  
This option allows you to select the color temperature of your choice.  
NOTE:  
• When [PRESENTATION] or [HIGH-BRIGHT] is selected in [REFERENCE], this function is not available.  
• When [WHITE BALANCE] settings has been changed, the color temperature value on screen does not reflect the real color  
temperature.  
[WHITE BALANCE]  
Adjusting White Balance [WHITE BALANCE]  
This allows you to adjust the white balance. Contrast for each color (RGB) to adjust the white level of the screen;  
Brightness for each color (RGB) is used to adjust the black level of the screen.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[CONTRAST]  
Adjusts the intensity of the image according to the incoming signal.  
[BRIGHTNESS]  
Adjusts the brightness level or the back raster intensity.  
[SHARPNESS]  
Controls the detail of the image for Video (not valid for RGB and digital signals).  
[COLOR]  
Increases or decreases the color saturation level (not valid for RGB and digital signals).  
[HUE]  
Varies the color level from +/− green to +/− blue. The red level is used as reference. This adjustment is only valid for  
Video, Component and TV standard inputs (not valid for RGB and digital signals).  
Input signal  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Sharpness  
Color  
Hue  
Computer (RGB analog)  
Computer (RGB digital)  
Component  
Video, S-Video  
Viewer, Network  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes=Adjustable, No=Not adjustable  
[RESET]  
The settings and adjustments for [PICTURE] will be returned to the factory settings with the exception of the following;  
Preset numbers and [REFERENCE] within the [DETAIL SETTINGS] screen when [STANDARD] is selected in [MODE].  
The settings and adjustments under [DETAIL SETTINGS] within the [PRESET] screen that are not currently select-  
ed will not be reset.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[IMAGE OPTIONS]  
Adjusting Clock and Phase [CLOCK/PHASE]  
This allows you to manually adjust CLOCK and PHASE.  
CLOCK.................... Use.this.item.to.fine.tune.the.computer.image.or.to.remove.any.vertical.banding.that.might.appear..This.  
function.adjusts.the.clock.frequencies.that.eliminate.the.horizontal.banding.in.the.image.  
This.adjustment.may.be.necessary.when.you.connect.your.computer.for.the.first.time.  
PHASE.................... Use.this.item.to.adjust.the.clock.phase.or.to.reduce.video.noise,.dot.interference.or.cross.talk..(This.is.  
evident.when.part.of.your.image.appears.to.be.shimmering.)  
Use.[PHASE].only.after.the.[CLOCK].is.complete.  
9ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Adjusting Horizontal/Vertical Position [HORIZONTAL POSITION/VERTICAL POSITION]  
Adjusts the image location horizontally and vertically.  
Selecting Overscan Percentage [OVERSCAN]  
Select overscan percentage (0%, 5% and 10%) for signal.  
Projected image  
Overscaned by 10%  
NOTE: When [NATIVE] is selected in [RESOLUTION], [OVERSCAN] is not available.  
9ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Selecting Aspect Ratio [ASPECT RATIO]  
.
Screen.Type.4:3.SCREEN.(VIDEO).  
Screen.Type.WIDE.SCREEN.(VIDEO).  
RGB  
Aspect Ratio allows you to select the best Aspect mode to display your source image.  
When screen type 4:3 SCREEN is selected for the source, the following selections will display:  
For VIDEO  
4:3.......................... Standard.4:3.aspect  
LETTERBOX............ Reduced.to.display.the.true.aspect.with.black.borders.on.top.and.bottom  
WIDE.SCREEN........ Left.&.Right.stretched.with.black.borders.on.top.and.bottom  
ZOOM..................... Left.&.Right.stretched..Left.&.Right.sides.cut..Available.for.4:3.only.  
When screen type WIDE SCREEN is selected for the source, the following selections will display:  
For VIDEO  
4:3.WINDOW.......... Reduced.to.display.the.true.aspect.with.black.borders.on.right.and.left  
LETTERBOX............ Standard.16:9.aspect  
WIDE.SCREEN........ Left.and.right.stretched.to.display.the.true.aspect  
4:3.FILL.................. Stretched.to.display.in.16:9.aspect.ratio  
For RGB  
4:3.......................... For.a.video.signal.with.an.aspect.ratio.of.4:3  
5:4.......................... For.a.video.signal.with.an.aspect.ratio.of.5:4  
16:9........................ For.a.video.signal.with.an.aspect.ratio.of.16:9  
16:10...................... For.a.video.signal.with.an.aspect.ratio.of.16:10  
15:9........................ For.a.video.signal.with.an.aspect.ratio.of.15:9  
NOTE:  
• You can adjust image position vertically for a source with black borders on top and bottom. ( page 108)  
• When [NATIVE] is selected in [RESOLUTION], [ASPECT RATIO] is not available.  
NOTE: Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or the attraction of public attention in a venue  
such as a coffee shop or hotel and employing compression or expansion of the screen image with a [ASPECT RATIO] or [SCREEN]  
setting may raise concern about the infringement of copyrights which are protected by copyright law.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[NP3250/NP2250/NP1250]  
VIDEO  
4:3  
4:3  
SQUEEZE  
LETTERBOX  
ASPECT RATIO  
4:3 SCREEN  
WIDE SCREEN  
ZOOM  
LETTERBOX  
LETTERBOX  
ASPECT RATIO  
WIDE SCREEN  
4:3 WINDOW  
4:3 FILL  
WIDE SCREEN  
RGB  
4:3  
5:4  
16:9  
16:10  
15:9  
ASPECT RATIO  
4:3 SCREEN  
4:3  
4:3  
5:4  
5:4  
16:9  
16:9  
16:10  
16:10  
15:9  
15:9  
ASPECT RATIO  
WIDE SCREEN  
[NP3250W]  
VIDEO  
4:3  
LETTERBOX  
SQUEEZE  
4:3  
ASPECT RATIO  
4:3 SCREEN  
4:3  
4:3  
LETTERBOX  
LETTERBOX  
WIDE SCREEN  
WIDE SCREEN  
ZOOM  
ZOOM  
4:3  
ASPECT RATIO  
WIDE SCREEN  
4:3 FILL  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
RGB  
4:3  
5:4  
16:9  
16:10  
15:9  
ASPECT RATIO  
4:3  
4:3  
5:4  
5:4  
16:9  
16:9  
16:10  
16:10  
15:9  
15:9  
4:3 SCREEN  
ASPECT RATIO  
WIDE SCREEN  
Typical resolutions and aspect ratios for computer screens.  
Resolution  
640 × 480  
Aspect Ratio  
VGA  
SVGA  
XGA  
SXGA  
WXGA  
WXGA  
UXGA  
4:3  
4:3  
4:3  
800 × 600  
1024 × 768  
1280 × 1024  
1280 × 768  
1280 × 800  
1600 × 1200  
5:4  
15:9  
16:10  
4:3  
Selecting Resolution [RESOLUTION]  
[AUTO]: Displays an RGB signal to fit the screen in the projector’s native resolution (NP3250/NP2250/NP1250:  
1024 × 768 pixels/NP3250W: 1280 × 800 pixels).  
[NATIVE]: Displays an RGB signal in its true resolution.  
Example: When a source with 800 × 600 pixels is selected.  
NP3ꢁ50/NPꢁꢁ50/NPꢀꢁ50  
NP3ꢁ50W  
[NATIVE]  
[AUTO]  
[NATIVE]  
[AUTO]  
1066  
1280  
1024  
1024  
800  
600  
800  
768  
768  
600  
800  
800  
When [NATIVE] is selected, [OVERSCAN] and [ASPECT RATIO] are not available.  
[RESOLUTION] is not available under the following conditions:  
-
-
-
When [SCREEN TYPE] is set for the resolution other than the projector’s native resolution.  
When a signal other than RGB is selected.  
When a signal with a higher resolution than the projector’s native resolution is displayed.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[VIDEO]  
Using Noise Reduction [NOISE REDUCTION]  
This function is used to reduce video noise.  
RANDOM.NR.......... Reduces.flickering.random.noise.in.an.image..  
MOSQUITO.NR....... Reduces.mosquito.noise.that.appears.around.the.edges.of.an.image.during.DVD.playback.  
BLOCK.NR.............. Reduces.block.noise.or.mosaic-like.patterns.by.selecting.ON.  
Selecting Interlaced Progressive Conversion Process Mode [DEINTERLACE]  
This function allows you to select an interlaced-to-progressive conversion process for video signals.  
AUTO...................... Determines.an.appropriate.interlaced-to-progressive.conversion.process.automatically.  
VIDEO..................... Applies.a.normal.interlaced-to-progressive.conversion.process.  
FILM....................... Applies.the.automatic.detection.mode.for.telecine.signals..This.option.is.recommended.for.a.movie pic-  
ture.  
NOTE: This function is not available with RGB signals.  
Turning On or Off the 3D Dimensional Separation [3DY/C SEPARATION]  
When projecting an image from a VIDEO input, set to ON to project the highest quality image.  
OFF......................... Turns.off.the.3.dimensional.separation.feature.  
ON.......................... Turns.on.the.3.dimensional.separation.feature.  
NOTE: Only available for NTSC 3.58 video signals.  
Adjusting Contrast Enhancement [CONTRAST ENHACEMENT]  
This function uses properties of the eye to improve picture contrast.  
Adjust this function to the desired level of enhancement.  
9ꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[AUDIO]  
Controlling Sound [VOLUME/BASS/TREBLE/BALANCE]  
Adjusts the volume, bass and treble level, left and right balance of the projector speaker and AUDIO OUT (Stereo  
Mini Jack).  
TIP:  
[VOLUME]  
• When no menus appear, the SELECT and buttons on the projector cabinet and the VOLUME +/− buttons work as a volume  
control.  
[BALANCE]  
• When the left/monaural of the video/component audio input is connected, the right and left channel sound from the AUDIO OUT  
(Stereo Mini Jack) is the same.  
Enabling 3D Surround [3D SURROUND]  
Turn on or off the 3D surround effect.  
If the AUDIO OUT stereo mini jack of the projector is connected to external equipment, adjusting the sound on the  
external equipment can cause sound to be distorted or cracked, depending on the bass, treble or 3D Surround  
adjustment. If this happens, return the adjustments of the projector to the factory default (BASS:0, TREBLE: 0, 3D  
SURROUND: OFF).  
NOTE: When the AUDIO OUT (Stereo Mini Jack of the projector is an external equipment, audio control on the external equipment  
may cause distorted or scratchy sound depending on the adjustments of BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE and 3D SURROUND. If this  
happens, return the adjustments of the projector to the factory preset ("0" for [BASS], "0" for [TREBLE], and "OFF" for [3D SUR-  
ROUND]).  
9ꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]  
[BASIC]  
Selecting Keystone Mode [KEYSTONE]  
This feature allows you to correct keystone distortion.  
Selecting this item will display the Keystone setting menu.  
You can correct vertical distortion manually from the menu. ( page 30)  
Changes will be saved even when you turn off the projector.  
NOTE: The [KEYSTONE] item is not available when [CORNERSTONE] or [GEOMETRIC CORRECTION] is selected.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Selecting Cornerstone Mode [CORNERSTONE]  
This option allows you to correct trapezoidal distortion.  
Selecting this item will display the Cornerstone adjustment screen. ( page 40)  
NOTE: The [CORNERSTONE] item is not available when [KEYSTONE] or [GEOMETRIC CORRECTION] is selected.  
Using the PIP/SIDE BY SIDE Function [PIP/SIDE BY SIDE]  
This function allows you to view two different signals simultaneously. ( page 43)  
MODE:  
This option allows you to select two modes: PIP and SIDE BY SIDE.  
PIP: This option allows you to view a sub picture in the main picture.  
SIDE BY SIDE: This allows you to view two pictures side by side.  
POSITION:  
When [PIP] is selected for [MODE], this option allows you to select the position of a sub picture in the main pic-  
ture.  
The options are: TOP-LEFT, TOP-RIGHT, BOTTOM LEFT, and BOTTOM RIGHT.  
NOTE: The [POSITION] cannot be selected when [SIDE BY SIDE] is selected.  
SOURCE:  
This option allows you to select a sub picture signal.  
The options are: OFF, VIDEO and S-VIDEO.  
Selecting [OFF] will cancel the PIP/SIDE BY SIDE mode and return to the normal screen.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Using the Wall Color Correction [WALL COLOR]  
This function allows for quick adaptive color correction in applications where the screen material is not white.  
Setting Lamp Mode to Normal or Eco [LAMP MODE]  
This feature enables you to select two brightness modes of the lamp: Normal and Eco modes. The lamp life can be  
extended by using the Eco mode. Selecting Eco mode decreases fan noise when compared to Normal mode.  
Lamp Mode  
NORMAL  
Description  
Status of LAMP indicator  
Off  
This is the default setting (100%  
Brightness).  
ECO  
Steady Green light  
Select this mode to increase the lamp  
life (approx. 80% Brightness (light  
output) on NP3250/NP3250W and  
approx. 88% Brightness (light output)  
on NP2250/NP1250).  
NOTE: If the projector is overheated in Normal mode, there may be a case where the Lamp mode will be forced into the Eco mode  
to protect the projector. This mode is called “forced Eco mode”.  
When the projector is in forced Eco mode, the picture brightness decreases. The LAMP indicator’s steady green light indicates the  
lamp is in Eco mode.  
When the projector comes back to normal temperature, the Lamp mode returns to Normal mode.  
In the forced Eco mode, changing [LAMP MODE] setting in the menu will not affect the actual lamp mode.  
ꢀ00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Using Off Timer [OFF TIMER]  
1. Select your desired time between 30 minutes and 16 hours: OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00.  
2. Press the ENTER button on the remote control.  
3. The remaining time starts counting down.  
4. The projector will turn off after the countdown is complete.  
NOTE:  
• To cancel the preset time, set [OFF] for the preset time or turn off the power.  
• When the remaining time reaches 3 minutes before the projector is turned off, the [THE PROJECTOR WILL TURN OFF WITHIN  
3 MINUTES] message will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.  
[TOOLS]  
Using Program Timer [PROGRAM TIMER]  
This option turns on/off the projector, changes video signals and switches lamp mode automatically at a specified  
time.  
NOTE:  
• Before setting the Program Timer, make sure that the [DATE, TIME PRESET] feature is set. ( page 104)  
• Make sure that the projector is in the stand by condition with the Main Power Switch on.  
• The projector has a built-in clock. The clock will keep working for about two weeks after the main power is turned off. If the  
main power is not supplied to the projector for two weeks or more, the built-in clock stops working.  
ꢀ0ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Setting a new program timer  
1. On the PROGRAM TIMER screen, use the SELECT or button to select [SETTINGS] and press the EN-  
TER button.  
The [PROGRAM LIST] screen will be displayed.  
NOTE: When the Program Timer is turned on, the [PROGRAM LIST] cannot be edited.  
2. Select a blank program number and press the ENTER button.  
The [EDIT] screen will be displayed.  
3. Make settings for each item as required.  
ACTIVE..............................Place.a.check.mark.to.enable.the.program.  
DAY....................................Select.days.of.the.week.for.the.program..To.execute.the.program.from.Monday.to.Friday,.select.  
[MON-FRI].To.execute.the.program.in.everyday.basis,.select.[EVERYDAY].  
TIME..................................Set.the.time.to.execute.the.program..Enter.time.in.24-hour.format.  
FUNCTION.........................Select.a.function.to.be.executed..Selecting.[POWER].will.allow.you.to.turn.on.or.off.the.projector.  
by.setting.[ADVANCED.SETTINGS]..Selecting.[SOURCE].will.allow.you.to.select.a.video.source.by.  
setting.[ADVANCED.SETTINGS]..Selecting.[LAMP.MODE].will.allow.you.to.select.either.[NORMAL].  
or.[ECO].by.setting.[ADVANCED.SETTINGS].  
ADVANCED.SETTINGS.......Select.power.on/off,.a.type.of.video.source,.or.lamp.mode.for.the.selected.item.in.[FUNCTION].  
REPEAT..............................Place.a.check.mark.to.repeat.the.program.continuing.basis..To.use.the.program.this.week.only,.  
clear.the.check.mark.  
ꢀ0ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
4. Select [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
This will complete the settings.  
You will be returned to the [PROGRAM LIST] screen.  
NOTE:  
• Up to 30 different timer settings can be programmed.  
• The Program Timer is executed on a set time basis, not in a program basis.  
• Once the program not marked with a check in [REPEAT] has been executed, the check mark in the [ACTIVE] check box will be  
cleared automatically and the program will be disabled.  
• When the on-time and the off-time are set for the same time, the off-time setting will take preference.  
• Two different sources are set for the same time, the larger program number will take preference.  
• The on-time setting will not be executed while the cooling fans are running or an error is occurring.  
• If the off-time setting is expired under the condition in which the power off is not possible, the off-timer setting will not be ex-  
ecuted until the power off becomes possible.  
• Programs not marked with a check mark in [ACTIVE] of the [EDIT] screen will not be executed even if the Program Timer is  
enabled.  
• When the projector is turned on by using the program timer and if you want to turn off the projector, set the off-time or do it  
manually so as not to leave the projector on for a long period of time.  
Activating the program timer  
1. Select [ON] on the [PROGRAM TIMER] screen and press the ENTER button.  
The [ON] will be activated.  
2. Press the EXIT button.  
The [PROGRAM TIMER] screen will be changed to the [TOOLS] screen.  
NOTE:  
• Selecting [OFF] will disable the Program Timer even when a program is marked with a check mark on [PROGRAM LIST]  
screen.  
• When the [ON] is turned on, the [PROGRAM LIST] cannot be edited. To edit the programs, select [OFF] to turn off the Program  
Timer.  
Changing the programmed settings  
1. On the [PROGRAM LIST] screen, select a program you want to edit and press the ENTER button.  
2. Change the settings on the [EDIT] screen.  
3. Select [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
The programmed settings will be changed.  
You will be returned to the [PROGRAM LIST] screen.  
Changing the order of programs  
1. On the [PROGRAM LIST] screen, select a program whose order you want to change and press the SE-  
LECT button.  
2. Press the SELECT button to select [ ] or [ ].  
3. Press the ENTER button a few times to select a row to which you wish to move the program.  
The order of the programs will be changed.  
ꢀ03  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Deleting the programs  
1. On the [PROGRAM LIST] screen, select a program number you want to delete and press the SELECT  
button.  
2. Press the SELECT button to select [DELETE].  
3. Press the ENTER button.  
The confirmation screen will be displayed.  
4. Select [YES] and press the ENTER button.  
The program will be deleted.  
This will complete deleting the program.  
Using [CORNERSTONE]  
(
page 40)  
Using [ENTRY LIST]  
(
page 86)  
Setting the Current Date and Time [DATE,TIME PRESET]  
You can set the current time, month, date, and year.  
NOTE: The projector has a built-in clock. The clock will keep working for about 2 weeks after the main power is turned off. If the  
main power is off for 2 weeks or more, the built-in clock will cease. If the built-in clock ceases, set the date and time again. The  
built-in clock will not cease while in the standby mode.  
TIME ZONE: Select your time zone.  
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME: Place a check mark to adjust the clock for daylight saving changes.  
INTERNET TIME SERVER: Place a check mark to turn on clock synchronization. When this option is turned on,  
the projector’s built-in clock will be synchronized with an Internet timer server in every 24 hours and at the time of  
projector’s start up.  
UPDATE button: Synchronizes the projector’s built-in clock immediately.  
The UPDATE button is not available unless the INTERNET TIME SERVER check box is turned on.  
Setting Mouse Pointer, Button and Sensitivity [MOUSE]  
This option lets you to change your USB mouse settings. The mouse settings feature is available for USB mouse  
only. Choose the settings you want:  
MOUSE.BUTTON.... [RIGHT.HAND].or.[LEFT.HAND]  
MOUSE.SENSITIVITY... [FAST],.[MEDIUM].or.[SLOW]  
Using [HELP]  
(
page 36)  
ꢀ04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Logging OffYour Projector [LOGOFF]  
This feature allows you to log off your projector without turning it off.  
Logging off your projector will prevent an unauthorized user from operating your projector.  
To log off your projector, follow the steps below.  
1. Press the MENU button and use the SELECT button to highlight [SETUP].  
2. Use the SELECT or the ENTER button to highlight [BASIC].  
3. Use the SELECT button to highlight [LOGOFF], and press the ENTER button.  
The [LOG OFF PROJECTOR /ARE YOU SURE?] message will be displayed.  
4. Select [YES] and press the ENTER button to log off your projector and close the menu, and then the  
LOGON screen will be displayed.  
NOTE:  
• When selecting [NO] and press the ENTER button, you will return to the Logoff screen in Step 2.  
To log on your projector, select a user name, then enter your password and select [OK] and press the ENTER  
button.  
The LOGON screen will close. Logging on your projector is done.  
NOTE:  
The default LOGON screen will be shown as follows:  
USER NAME ADMINISTRATOR  
PASSWORD No setting  
See “Limiting Access Level to Available Menu Items” on page 51 for entering a user name and assigning a password.  
Selecting Menu Language [LANGUAGE]  
You can choose one of 21 languages for on-screen instructions.  
ꢀ05  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[MENU]  
Selecting Menu Color [COLOR SELECT]  
You can choose between two options for menu color: color and monochrome.  
Turning On / Off Source Display, Message and Time [SOURCE DISPLAY], [MESSAGE DISPLAY],  
[TIME DISPLAY], [ID DISPLAY]  
SOURCE.DISPLAY.........This.option.turns.on.or.off.input.name.display.such.as.Computer.1,.Computer.2,.Computer.3,.Compo-  
nent,.Video,.and.No.Input.to.be.displayed.on.the.top.right.of.the.screen.  
MESSAGE.DISPLAY..........This.option.turns.on.or.off.messages..Even.though.selecting.[OFF],.the.following.message.will.appear.  
.
•.“Projector.is.locked”..When.the.projector.security.is.unlocked,.the.message.will.disappear.  
TIME.DISPLAY..............This.option.turns.on.or.off.the.current.time.displayed.on.the.top.left.of.the.screen.  
ID.DISPLAY...................This.option.turns.on.or.off.the.ID.number.which.is.displayed.when.the.ID.SET.button.on.the.remote.  
control.is.pressed.  
NOTE: The source and current time will be displayed for the time specified in [MENU DISPLAY TIME]. When [MANUAL] is se-  
lected in [MENU DISPLAY TIME], the source and current time will be always displayed.  
Selecting Menu Display Time [MENU DISPLAY TIME]  
This option allows you to select how long the projector waits after the last touch of a button to turn off the menu. The  
preset choices are [MANUAL], [AUTO 5 SEC], [AUTO 15 SEC], and [AUTO 45 SEC]. The [AUTO 45 SEC] is the  
factory preset.  
Selecting a Color or Logo for Background [BACKGROUND]  
Use this feature to display a blue/black screen or logo when no signal is available. The default background is blue.  
You can change the logo screen using the Viewer feature. ( page 72)  
NOTE:  
• When the DVI [COMPUTER 3(DVI-D) IN] input is selected with no signal, the blueback is displayed in regardless of the setting  
[LOGO].  
• When the BACKGROUND LOCK in [SECURITY SETTINGS] is turned on, the background cannot be changed.  
• Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.  
Selecting Interval Time for Filter Message [FILTER MESSAGE]  
This option allows you to select the time preference between displaying the message for cleaning the filters. Clean  
the filter when you get the message “PLEASE CLEAN FILTER.” ( page 134)  
Five options are available: OFF, 100[H], 200[H], 500[H], 1000[H]  
The default setting is 500[H].  
NOTE: The message for filter cleaning will be displayed for one minute when the projector is turned on or off. To cancel the mes-  
sage, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.  
NOTE: Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.  
ꢀ0ꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[INSTALLATION(1)]  
Selecting Projector Orientation [ORIENTATION]  
This reorients your image for your type of projection. The options are: desktop front projection, ceiling rear projec-  
tion, desktop rear projection, and ceiling front projection.  
DESKTOP FRONT  
CEILING REAR  
DESKTOP REAR  
CEILING FRONT  
ꢀ0ꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Selecting Aspect Ratio and Position for Screen [SCREEN]  
SCREEN.TYPE........ Select.one.of.two.options:.4:3.SCREEN.or.WIDE.SCREEN.for.the.screen.to.be.used..See.also.[ASPECT.  
RATIO]..  
.page.93)  
(
POSITION............... This.feature.allows.you.to.adjust.the.vertical.position.of.the.image.when.WIDE.SCREEN.has.been.selected.  
for.the.screen.type.  
(not.available.  
on.NP3250W)  
When.WIDE.SCREEN.has.been.selected.there.is.no-signal.area.above.and.below.the.image.  
no-signal area  
NOTE: This option is available only when [WIDE SCREEN] is selected in [SCREEN TYPE].  
NOTE:  
• After changing the screen type, check the setting of [ASPECT RATIO] in the menu. ( page 93)  
• NP3250/NP2250/NP1250: [POSITION] is not available when [4:3 SCREEN] is selected for [SCREEN TYPE] or when [LETTERBOX]  
is selected for [ASPECT RATIO].  
Using Geometric Correction [GEOMETRIC CORRECTION]  
This feature retrieves geometric data registered in the projector memory.  
Three presets of geometric data have been registered. To turn off this feature, select [OFF].  
NOTE:  
• The [KEYSTONE] and [CORNERSTONE] adjustments are not available when geometric data is applied.  
• To clear your geometric data, press the 3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds.  
The [GEOMETRIC CORRECTION] feature can cause an image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically.  
ꢀ08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Using Multi-Screen Compensation [MULTI-SCREEN COMP.]  
This feature allows you to match images projected from multiple projectors that are placed in parallel.  
MODE..................... OFF:.Turns.off.this.function.to.return.to.the.normal.brightness..  
.
ON:.Turns.on.this.function.to.make.the.screen.darker..The.[BRIGHTNESS].and.the.[CONTRAST].can.be.  
adjusted.  
CONTRAST............. Adjusts.the.bright.part.of.the.picture.  
BRIGHTNESS.......... Adjusts.the.dark.part.of.the.picture.  
Adjusting  
1. Prepare black and white images so that the images can be displayed on the computer screen.  
2. Display the black image on the computer screen, and project the image from the projector.  
3. Select [MULTI-SCREEN COMP.]  
[MODE]  
[ON].  
4. Adjust the dark part of the images.  
Press the SELECT  
another projector.  
button to select [BRIGHTNESS] and use the SELECT  
or  
to match the black part of  
5. Display the white screen on the computer screen.  
Project the image from two or more projectors.  
6. Adjust the bright part of the images.  
Press the SELECT button to select [CONTRAST] and use the SELECT or to match the white part of an-  
other projector.  
Moving the slide bar toward [+] (plus) can change the white part of the image. Should this happen, move the  
slide bar toward [−] (minus) to adjust the brightness.  
TIP:  
• When you use multiple projectors, you can use the [CONTROL ID] function to operate a single projector or all the projectors  
from the remote control. ( page 125)  
• Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.  
ꢀ09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[INSTALLATION(2)]  
[NETWORK SETTINGS]  
This feature allows you to set various setting items when the projector is used on your network.  
CAUTION  
• Consult with your network administrator about these settings.  
• The NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W series projectors distributed in some areas and countries do not  
come standard with the USB Wireless LAN Unit.  
If you purchase the projector without the USB Wireless LAN Unit installed and need to present to the pro-  
jector via a wireless connection, the optional USB Wireless LAN Unit must be installed.  
Hints on How to Set Up LAN Connection  
To configure the projector to communicate on the network using the LAN port (RJ-45) or Wireless LAN Unit:  
1. Select the [WIRED] tab for the LAN port (RJ-45) or the [WIRELESS] tab for the Wireless LAN Unit.  
2. On the [WIRED] tab or the [WIRELESS] tab, select a number from the [PROFILES] list for your LAN  
settings.  
Two settings can be stored in memory for each the LAN port and the Wireless LAN Unit respectively.  
3. On the [WIRED] tab or the [WIRELESS] tab, turn on or off [DHCP], specify IP address, Subnet Mask,  
Gateway, DNS Configuration, and WINS Configuration. Select [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
(
page 113, 114)  
To recall the settings from memory:  
After selecting the [WIRED] tab or the [WIRELESS] tab, select the number from the [PROFILES] list.  
Select [OK] and press the ENTER button. ( page 113, 114)  
To connect a DHCP server:  
On the [WIRED] tab or the [WIRELESS] tab, select [DHCP] and press the ENTER button. A check mark will be  
placed. Select again and press the ENTER button. The check box will be cleared.  
When setting an IP address without using a DHCP server, clear the check box for [DHCP]. ( page 113, 114)  
To set only for wireless LAN (NETWORK TYPE and WEP/WPA):  
1. On the [WIRELESS] tab, select [PROFILES] and then select [PROFILE 1] or [PROFILE 2].  
2. On the [WIRELESS] tab, select [ADVANCED] and press the ENTER button. The [ADVANCED] menu  
will be displayed. ( page 115, 116)  
To select a wireless LAN access point:  
1. On the [WIRELESS] tab, select [PROFILES] and then select [PROFILE 1] or [PROFILE 2].  
2. On the [WIRELESS] tab, select [ADVANCED] and press the ENTER button.  
3. On the Advanced menu, select [CONNECTION]  
4. Select an SSID which you can access.  
[SITE SURVEY] and press the ENTER button.  
To select an SSID, highlight [SSID] and use the SELECT  
ton. When you do not use [SITE SURVEY], simply enter an SSID and [INFRASTRUCTURE] or [AD  
to select [OK] and press the ENTER but-  
HOC]. ( page 115)  
ꢀꢀ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
To receive error messages or information on the remaining lamp life via e-mail:  
1. On the [MAIL] tab, select [ALERT MAIL] and press the ENTER button. A check mark will be placed.  
2. Set [SENDER’S ADDRESS], [SMTP SERVER NAME] and [RECIPIENT’S ADDRESS]. Select [OK] and  
press the ENTER button.  
(
page 118)  
To execute [EASY CONNECTION] using Image Express Utility 2.0:  
The [EASY CONNECTION] is a mode that can abbreviate the troublesome LAN settings when using the Image  
Express Utility 2.0 and connecting the PC and projector via a wireless LAN.  
The Image Express Utility 2.0 is contained on the supplied User Supportware 6 CD-ROM. To use [EASY CON-  
NECTION], select [WIRELESS]  
[PROFILES]  
[EASY CONNECTION]. ( page 114)  
NOTE: This function can be used when Windows XP is used as the OS and when you have a “Computer Administrator” privi-  
lege. If the OS is Windows Vista, input of logon password as “Administrator” may be prompted.  
[GENERAL]  
This page allows you to specify a unique projector name and to check the current status of the LAN settings.  
ꢀꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[PROJECTOR NAME]  
Specify a unique projector name. Press to display the software keyboard and type in. Up to 16 alphanumeric  
characters, signs and symbols can be used. After entering a name, select [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
NOTE: The [PROJECTOR NAME] will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.  
Using Software Keyboard  
1.to.0.and  
Characters........ Use.to.type.in.password.or.keyword.  
MODE..................... Selects.one.of.three.modes.for.numbers,.alphabet.and.special.characters.  
SP........................... Inserts.a.space  
BS........................... Deletes.one.character.backward  
<<........................... Returns.to.the.previous  
>>........................... Advances.to.the.next  
OK........................... Executes.the.selection  
CANCEL.................. Cancels.the.selection  
(.page.81)  
ꢀꢀꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[WIRED]  
PROFILES (for LAN port [RJ-45]):  
Up to two settings for the LAN port (RJ-45) can be stored in memory of the projector.  
Select [PROFILE 1] or [PROFILE 2] and then do settings for [DHCP] and the other options.  
After doing this, select [OK] and press the ENTER button. This will store your settings in memory.  
To recall the settings from memory:  
After selecting the [WIRED] tab, select the [PROFILE 1] or [PROFILE 2] from the [PROFILES] list.  
Select [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
DHCP:  
Enabling this option automatically assigns an IP address to the projector from your DHCP server.  
Disabling this option allows you to register the IP address or subnet mask number obtained from your network  
administrator.  
IP.ADDRESS........... Set.your.IP.address..Press. .to.display.the.software.keyboard.and.type.in.12.numeric.characters.  
SUBNET.MASK....... Set.your.subnet.mask.number..Press  
.
.to.display.the.software.keyboard.and.type.in.12.numeric.characters.  
GATEWAY............... Set.the.default.gateway.of.the.network.connected.to.the.projector..Press. .to.display.the.software.keyboard.  
and.type.in.12.numeric.characters.  
DNS.CONFIGURATION... Type.in.the.IP.address.of.DNS.server.on.the.network.connected.to.the.projector..12.numeric.characters.  
are.used.  
WINS.CONFIGURATION... Type.in.the.IP.address.of.your.WINS.server.of.the.network.connected.to.the.projector..This.is.used.for.a.  
shared.folder.on.a.different.subnet.to.specify.it.as.a.WINS.server..12.numeric.characters.are.used.  
NOTE: When [DHCP] is turned on, this option is not available.  
RECONNECT........... Use.this.button.to.retry.to.connect.the.projector.to.a.network..Try.this.if.you.have.changed.[PROFILES].  
ꢀꢀ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[WIRELESS]  
PROFILES (for USB Wireless LAN unit):  
To execute a wireless LAN easily using Image Express Utility 2.0, select [EASY CONNECTION].  
Up to two settings for the USB wireless LAN unit can be stored in memory of the projector.  
Select [PROFILE 1] or [PROFILE 2] and then do settings for [DHCP] and the other options.  
After doing this, select [OK] and press the ENTER button. This will store your settings in memory.  
To recall the settings from memory:  
After selecting the [WIRELESS] tab, select the [PROFILE 1], [PROFILE 2], or [DISABLE] from the [PROFILES]  
list.  
Select [OK] and press the ENTER button. Selecting [DISABLE] will stop emitting radio waves from the USB  
Wireless LAN Unit.  
DHCP:  
Place a check mark to automatically assign an IP address to the projector from your DHCP server.  
Clear this check box to register the IP address or subnet mask number obtained from your network administrator.  
IP.ADDRESS........... Set.your.IP.address..Press. .to.display.the.software.keyboard.and.type.in.12.numeric.characters.  
SUBNET.MASK....... Set.your.subnet.mask.number..Press. .to.display.the.software.keyboard.and.type.in.12.numeric.characters.  
GATEWAY............... Set.the.default.gateway.of.the.network.connected.to.the.projector..Press. .to.display.the.software.keyboard.  
and.type.in.12.numeric.characters.  
DNS.CONFIGURATION... Type.in.the.IP.address.of.DNS.server.on.the.network.connected.to.the.projector..Twelve.numeric.charac-  
ters.are.used.  
WINS.CONFIGURATION... Type.in.the.IP.address.of.your.WINS.server.of.the.network.connected.to.the.projector..This.is.used.for.a.  
shared.folder.on.a.different.subnet.to.specify.it.as.a.WINS.server..12.numeric.characters.are.used.  
NOTE: When [DHCP] is turned on, this option is not available.  
ADVANCED............. Displays.the.Advanced.menu.which.includes.various.setting.for.wireless.LAN.connection.(NETWORK.  
TYPE.and.SECURITY)..See.the.Advanced.menu.later.on.  
RECONNECT........... Use.this.button.to.retry.to.connect.the.projector.to.a.network..Try.this.if.you.have.changed.[PROFILES].  
NOTE: If you select [EASY CONNECTION] from [PROFILES], you cannot make settings to DHCP and its following items ex-  
cept [CHANNEL] in [ADVANCED].  
ꢀꢀ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[ADVANCED] menu  
[CONNECTION] (required for wireless only)  
SITE SURVEY:  
Displays a list of available SSIDs for wireless LAN on site. Select an SSID which you can access.  
To select an SSID, highlight [SSID] and use the SELECT to select [OK] and press the ENTER button.  
: Wireless access point  
: Ad Hoc PC  
: WEP or WPA enabled  
SSID (Network name):  
Enter an identifier (SSID) for wireless LAN when selecting [INFRASTRUCTURE] or [AD HOC] in [NETWORK  
TYPE]. Communication can be done only with equipment whose SSID matches SSID for your wireless LAN. Up  
to 32 alphanumeric characters can be used (case sensitive).  
NETWORK TYPE:  
Select communication method when using wireless LAN.  
INFRASTRUCTURE.. Select.this.option.when.communicating.with.one.or.more.equipment.connected.to.the.wireless.or.wired.  
LAN.network.via.a.wireless.access.point.  
AD.HOC.................. Select.this.option.when.using.the.wireless.LAN.to.directly.communicate.with.a.computer.in.peer-to-peer.  
mode..This.is.a.method.that.meets.the.IEEE802.11.wireless.standard.  
NOTE: When in Ad Hoc mode, only 802.11b is available for communication method.  
Data transmission speed in Ad Hoc mode is limited up to 11Mbps.  
CHANNEL:  
Select a channel. Available channels vary depending on the country and region.  
TIP: When you select [INFRASTRUCTURE], make sure that the projector and your access point are on the same channel;  
when you select [AD HOC], make sure that the projector and your computer are on the same channel.  
ꢀꢀ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[SECURITY] (required for wireless only)  
SECURITY TYPE  
Select encryption mode for secure transmission.  
When [WEP] or [DISABLE] is selected in [SECURITY TYPE]:  
Select this option whether using the WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key for encryption or not. To use encryp-  
tion, specify WEP key.  
DISABLE................. Will.not.turn.on.the.encryption.feature..Your.communications.may.be.monitored.by.someone.  
WEP(64bit)............. Uses.64-bit.datalength.for.secure.transmission.  
WEP(128bit)........... Uses.128-bit.datalength.for.secure.transmission..This.option.will.increase.privacy.and.security.when.  
compared.to.use.of.64-bit.datalength.encryption.  
WPA-PSK,.WPA-EAP,.WPA2-PSK,.WPA2-EAP  
...................................These.options.provide.stronger.security.than.WEP.  
For.setting,.refer.to.“WPA.Setting.Guide”.on.the.supplied.User’s.Manual.CD-ROM.  
NOTE:  
• The WEP settings must be the same as communication devices such as PC or access point in your wireless network.  
• When you use WEP, your image transmission speed will slow down.  
• [WPA-PSK], [WPA-EAP], [WPA2-PSK] and [WPA2-EAP] are not available when [AD HOC] is selected from [NETWORK  
TYPE].  
KEY SELECT:  
Selects one WEP key from the four keys below when selecting [64BIT] or [128BIT] in [SECURITY TYPE].  
KEY1-4:  
Enter encryption key when selecting [64BIT] or [128BIT] in [SECURITY TYPE].  
Up to 5 characters can be set in 64 bit, and up to 13 characters in 128 bit.  
The key can also be set in hexadecimal digit.  
Press the [HEX] button to change to [ASCII] to set the key in ASCII digit.You can toggle this button between [ASCII]  
and [HEX].  
* Enter 0x(numeral and alphabet respectively) right in front of your key code.  
* Hexadecimal uses 0 to 9 and A to F.  
* When setting in a hexadecimal digit, up to 10 characters can be set in 64 bit, and up to 26 characters in 128  
bit.  
ꢀꢀꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Using Software Keyboard to enter an encryption key  
1. Select one of [KEY 1], [KEY 2], [KEY 3] and [KEY 4] and press the ENTER button.  
The software keyboard will be displayed.  
2. Use the SELECT  
button to select one key and press the ENTER button.  
  
3. After finishing entering the WEP key, use the SELECT  
TER button.  
button to select [OK] and press the EN-  
  
The software keyboard will disappear.  
When [WPA-PSK], [WPA-EAP], [WPA2-PSK] or [WPA2-EAP] is selected in [SECURITY TYPE]:  
ENCRYPTION TYPE: Select [TKIP] or [AES].  
KEY:  
Enter encryption key. Key length must be eight or greater and 63 or less.  
[AUTHENTICATION] (required for wireless only)  
Setting is required for using WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP. For setting, refer to “WPA Setting Guide” on the supplied  
User’s Manual CD-ROM.  
[DOMAIN]  
HOST.NAME........... Type.in.a.hostname..Up.to.15.alphanumeric.characters.can.be.used.  
DOMAIN.NAME....... Type.in.domain.name.of.the.network.connected.to.the.projector..Up.to.60.alphanumeric.characters.can.be.  
used.  
ꢀꢀꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[MAIL]  
ALERT MAIL:  
Checking this box enables Alert Mail feature.  
This option notifies your computer of an error message via e-mail when using wireless or wired LAN. The error  
message will be notified when the projector lamp has reached the end of its usable life or an error occurs in the  
projector.  
Sample of a message sent from the projector:  
The lamp is at the end of its usable life. Please replace the lamp.  
Projector Name: X X X X  
Lamp Hours Used: xxxx [H]  
SENDER’S ADDRESS:  
Specify the senders address. Use the Software keyboard. Up to 60 alphanumeric and symbols characters can  
be used. See “Using Software Keyboard” in Appendix for more details.  
SMTP SERVER NAME:  
Type in the SMTP server name to be connected to the projector. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used.  
RECIPIENT’S ADDRESS 1 to 3:  
Type in your recipient’s address. Up to 60 alphanumeric and symbols characters can be used.  
TEST MAIL:  
Send a test mail to check if your settings are correct.  
NOTE:  
• If you entered an incorrect address in a test, you may not receive an Alert mail. Should this happen, check if the Recipient’s  
Address is correctly set.  
• Unless any one of the [SENDER’S ADDRESS], [SMTP SERVER’S NAME] or [RECIPIENT’S ADDRESS 1-3] is selected, [TEST  
MAIL] is not available.  
• Be sure to highlight [OK] and press the ENTER button before executing [TEST MAIL].  
NOTE: To use the Mail Alert feature on wireless LAN connection, select [INFRASTRUCTURE] for [NETWORK TYPE].  
ꢀꢀ8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Selecting Communication Speed [COMMUNICATION SPEED]  
This feature sets the baud rate of the PC Control port (D-Sub 9 Pin). It supports data rates from 4800 to 38400 bps.  
The default is 38400 bps. Select the appropriate baud rate for your equipment to be connected (depending on the  
equipment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs).  
Your selected communication speed will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.  
Setting Security [SECURITY SETTINGS]  
Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [CONTROL PANEL LOCK]  
This option turns on or off the Control Panel Lock function.  
NOTE:  
• This Control Panel Lock does not affect the remote control functions.  
• When the control panel is locked, pressing and holding the EXIT button on the projector cabinet for about 10 seconds will  
change the setting to [OFF].  
Setting a Password [BACKGROUND LOCK]  
A password can be set for your projector to avoid operation by an unauthorized person.  
When [BACKGROUND LOCK] is set, changing the background data in the USB memory will display the Password  
input screen.  
NOTE: When [BACKGROUND LOCK] is turned on, [BACKGROUND] cannot be selected from the menu.  
ꢀꢀ9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[ENTRY]  
To assign your password:  
NOTE: Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be assigned.  
1. Type a password.  
Select the [ENTER PASSWORD] entry box and press the ENTER button. ( page 81)  
An asterisk will be displayed.  
The Software keyboard appears. Use the Software keyboard to type a password on the [ENTER PASS-  
WORD] screen and press the ENTER button.  
The [CONFIRM PASSWORD] screen will be displayed.  
2. Type the same password again and press the ENTER button.  
Your password will be assigned.  
[DELETE]  
To delete your password:  
1. Select [DELETE PASSWORD] and press the ENTER button.  
2. Enter your password.  
An asterisk will be displayed.  
3. Press the ENTER button.  
Your password will be deleted.  
NOTE:  
• Do not forget your password. However, if you forget your password, consult with your dealer.  
• The [BACKGROUND LOCK] will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.  
ACCOUNT LOCK  
When [ACCOUNT LOCK] is set to [ON], you can set it to [OFF].  
When [ACCOUNT LOCK] is set to [OFF], you can set it to [ON].  
The [ACCOUNT] setting is available only when [ACCOUNT LOCK] is set to [OFF].  
NOTE: Do not forget your password. However, if you forget your password, use the projector’s ADMINISTRATOR account to log  
on and set [ACCOUNT LOCK] to [OFF].  
ACCOUNT  
See page 51.  
ꢀꢁ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[SECURITY]  
The Security function enables you to protect your projector so that the projector will not project a signal unless you  
enter a keyword. There is also an option to lock the projector by using a registered USB memory* as a protect key.  
Once you have registered your USB memory as a protect key, you are required to insert the registered USB mem-  
ory into the USB port of the projector each time you turn on the projector. You can enable the Security function by  
using a keyword only. ( page 45)  
*
The projector does not support NTFS formatted USB memory device.  
Be sure to use a USB memory device formatted with the FAT32, FAT16 or FAT le system.  
To format your USB memory device in your computer, refer to the document or help file that comes with your  
Windows.  
ON/OFF................... This.turns.the.Security.function.on.or.off..This.setting.will.take.effect.when.the.projector.is.turned.on.next.  
time.  
KEYWORD.............. Enter.an.appropriate.keyword.when.you.use.the.Security.function..(Up.to.10.characters.can.be.used.).The.  
Security.function.is.available.only.when.your.keyword.is.entered.  
USE.PROTECT.KEY... Check.this.box.to.lock.your.projector.when.using.a.USB.memory..To.use.a.keyword.without.a.USB.mem-  
ory,.do.not.check.this.box.  
READ...................... Reads.data.from.a.USB.memory.  
REGISTER............... Registers.data.from.the.USB.memory..The.Security.function.is.not.available.unless.at.least.one.USB.  
memory.is.registered..(if.the.[USE.PROTECT.KEY].check.box.is.selected).Up.to.5.USB.memory.devices.  
can.be.registered.  
DELETE................... Deletes.data.of.a.registered.USB.memory.  
To set up a keyword to enable the Security function without using a registered USB memory.  
1. Use the SELECT or button to select [KEYWORD] and use the software keyboard to enter a keyword.  
NOTE: Please make a note of your keyword.  
2. Use the SELECT or button to select [OFF] and then use the SELECT or to select [ON].  
3. Use the SELECT or button to select [OK], then press the ENTER button.  
The [AREYOU SURE?] message will appear.  
4. Use the SELECT or button to select [YES] and press the ENTER button.  
The Security function takes effect.  
ꢀꢁꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
To register a USB memory device as a protect key.  
Preparation: Insert the USB memory device into the USB port (type A) of the projector.  
1. Use the SELECT or button to select [USE PROTECT KEY] and press the ENTER button.  
2. Use the SELECT or button to select [READ] and press the ENTER button.  
Data of the USB memory will be read into the projector.  
3. Use the SELECT or button to select [REGISTER] and press the ENTER button.  
Downloaded data will be registered and be displayed in the list window.  
4. Use the SELECT or button to select [KEYWORD] and use the software keyboard to enter a keyword.  
NOTE: Please make a note of your keyword.  
5. Use the SELECT or button to select [OFF] and then use the SELECT or to select [ON].  
6. Use the SELECT or button to select [OK], then press the ENTER button.  
The [AREYOU SURE?] message will appear.  
7. Use the SELECT or button to select [YES] and press the ENTER button.  
The Security function takes effect.  
To turn on the projector when Security is enabled (when using your keyword only).  
1. Press and hold the POWER button for a minimum of two seconds.  
The projector will be turned on and a message to the effect that the projector is security-protected will  
be displayed.  
2. Press the MENU button.  
The Release Code input screen will be displayed.  
3. Enter your keyword in the Release Code input screen.  
You can view the projected image.  
NOTE: Do not forget your keyword. However, if you forget your keyword, NEC or your dealer will provide you with your Release  
Code. See more information at the end of this section.  
To turn on the projector when Security is enabled (when using USB memory device as a protect  
key).  
Preparation: Insert the registered USB memory device into the USB port (type A) of the projector.  
Press and hold the POWER button for a minimum of two seconds.  
The projector will turn on and then recognize the USB memory device. Once the image has been projected, it will  
stay on without the USB memory device.  
The projector does not support NTFS formatted USB memory device.  
Be sure to use a USB memory device formatted with the FAT32, FAT16 or FAT le system.  
To format your USB memory device in your computer, refer to the document or help file that comes with your  
Windows.  
We do not warrant that the USB port of the projector will support all USB memory devices in the market.  
When the projector is turned on, if the registered USB memory device is not inserted into the projector, no  
signal will be displayed with a message to the effect that the projector is security-protected. To turn off the se-  
curity protection, insert the registered USB memory device into the projector.  
ꢀꢁꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
The security disable mode is maintained until the main power is turned off (by setting the main power switch  
to “O” or unplugging the power cord). In the following cases you will be asked to check the protect key or input  
the keyword:  
(1)When [OK] is selected at an image for which security is set and the power is turned off then back on  
(2)When the main power is turned off then back on while the security function is enabled  
(3)When you attempt to display an image for which security is set while the security function is enabled  
Blanks (spaces) cannot be used in the Keyword section.  
To delete USB memory data you registered.  
1. Use the SELECT or button to select [DELETE] and use the SELECT button to select the list window.  
2. Use the SELECT or button to select the information on the USB memory device you wish to delete.  
3. Press the SELECT button to select [DELETE] and press the ENTER button.  
The information on the USB memory device will be deleted.  
If you’ve lost your registered USB memory, proceed as follows:  
1. Press and hold the POWER button for a minimum of two seconds.  
The projector will be turned on and display a message to the effect that the projector is security-protected.  
2. Press the MENU button.  
The Release Code input screen will be displayed as well as your Request Code (24 alphanumeric characters).  
NOTE: NEC or your dealer will provide you with your Release Code in exchange for your registered keyword and Request Code.  
See more information at the end of this section.  
3. Enter your Release Code in the Release Code Input screen.  
The security protection will be turned off.  
NOTE:  
• Some brands of USB memory devices cannot be used as a protect key.  
• You should register one or more USB memory devices in case your registered USB memory device is damaged or stolen. Up to  
5 pieces can be registered.  
• Once the registered USB memory device has been formatted, the USB memory device cannot be recognized as your registered  
protect key.  
The Security will not be disabled by using [RESET].  
Setting a Password for PJLink [PJLink]  
This option allows you to set a password when you use the PJLink feature.  
Password: Enter a password (up to 32 characters)  
To set and delete a password, repeat steps described in [BACKGROUND LOCK].  
NOTE: Do not forget your password. However, if you forget your password, consult with your dealer.  
NOTE: What is PJLink?  
PJLink is a standardization of protocol used for controlling projectors of different manufacturers. This standard protocol is estab-  
lished by Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association (JBMIA) in 2005.  
The projector supports all the commands of PJLink Class 1.  
Setting of PJLink will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.  
ꢀꢁ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Setting a Password for HTTP Server [HTTP SERVER]  
This option allows you to assign a password when you use your HTTP server. A password must be between 1 and  
10 alphanumeric characters.  
To set and delete a password, repeat steps described in [BACKGROUND LOCK].  
Turning On or Off Remote Sensor [REMOTE SENSOR]  
This option determines which remote sensor on the projector is enabled in wireless mode.  
The options are: FRONT/BACK, FRONT, and BACK.  
ꢀꢁ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Setting ID to the Projector [CONTROL ID]  
NOTE: This function is available only when the optional remote control (NP02RC) is used. This function will not work with the re-  
mote control included with the NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W projector.  
You can operate multiple projectors separately and independently with the same single remote control. To do  
so,you have to assign an ID number to each projector.  
CONTROL.ID.NUMBER.......... Select.a.number.from.1.to.254.you.wish.to.assign.to.your.projector.  
CONTROL.ID.......................... Select.[OFF].to.turn.off.the.CONTROL.ID.setting.and.select.[ON].to.turn.on.the.CONTROL.ID.  
setting.  
NOTE:  
• Selecting [ON] for [CONTROL ID] will not make the remote control supplied with the projector inoperable. The buttons on the  
projector cabinet can be used. Neither can you operate the projector by using the optional remote control NP01RC that does  
not has the CONTROL ID function.  
• Pressing and holding the ENTER button on the projector cabinet for 10 seconds will display the menu for canceling the Control  
ID.  
• Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.  
L-CLICK  
R-CLICK  
Using the Remote Control to change IDs  
VOLUME  
MAGNIFY  
PAGE  
UP  
1. Press the ID SET button on the remote control.  
DOWN  
PICTURE  
AV-MUTE  
LAMP MODE  
3D REFORM  
ASPECT  
The CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.  
FREEZE  
HELP  
FOCUS  
LENS SHIFT /ZOOM  
ID  
If the projector can be operated with the current remote control ID, the [ACTIVE] will be  
displayed. If the projector cannot be operated with the current remote control ID, the [IN-  
ACTIVE] will be displayed. To operate the inactive projector, assign the ID by using the fol-  
lowing procedure (Step 2).  
OFF  
ON  
POWER  
COMPUTER  
AUTO ADJ.  
1
2
3
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO COMPONENT HDMI  
VIEWER NETWORK  
PIP  
2. Press one of 0 to 9 buttons while pressing and holding the ID SET button on the re-  
mote control.  
1
4
7
2
3
5
8
0
6
9
The range of IDs is from 1 to 254.  
CLEAR  
ID  
To clear the ID:  
Press the CLEAR button while pressing the ID SET button.  
L-CLICK  
R-CLICK  
VOLUME  
MAGNIFY  
PAGE  
UP  
NOTE:  
• Setting “0 (zero)” means to clear the ID.  
• You cannot operate the projector using the remote control if the remote ID is not the same as the  
projector ID.  
DOWN  
PICTURE  
AV-MUTE  
LAMP MODE  
3D REFORM  
ASPECT  
FREEZE  
HELP  
FOCUS  
LENS SHIFT /ZOOM  
• No ID means that all the projectors can be operated together with a single remote control. To set “No  
ID” enter “000” or press the CLEAR button.  
ID  
3. Release the ID SET button.  
The updated CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.  
NOTE: The IDs can be cleared in a few days after the batteries are run down or removed.  
ꢀꢁ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[OPTIONS]  
Setting Auto Adjust [AUTO ADJUST]  
This feature sets the Auto Adjust mode so that the RGB image can be automatically or manually adjusted for noise  
and stability.You can automatically make adjustment in two ways: [NORMAL] and [FINE].  
OFF......................... The.RGB.image.will.not.be.automatically.adjusted.  
You.can.manually.optimize.the.RGB.image.  
NORMAL................. Default.setting..The.RGB.image.will.be.automatically.adjusted..Normally.select.this.option.  
FINE........................ Select.this.option.if.ne.adjustment.is.needed..It.takes.more.time.to.switch.to.the.source.than.when.  
[NORMAL].is.selected.  
Enabling Auto Power On [AUTO POWER ON (AC)]  
Turns the projector on automatically when the power cable is inserted into an active power outlet and the main pow-  
er switch is turned on. This eliminates the need to always use the POWER (ON/STANDBY) button on the remote  
control or projector cabinet.  
To use the AUTO POWER ON (AC) function, you must first press the main power switch to the position “On” before  
plugging in the power cable.  
Turning On the Projector By Applying RGB Signal [AUTO POWER ON(COMPꢀ/ꢁ)]  
When the projector is in standby condition, applying an RGB signal from a computer connected to the COMPUTER  
1 IN or the COMPUTER 2 IN connector will power on the projector and simultaneously project the computer’s im-  
age.  
This functionality eliminates the need to always use the POWER button on the remote control or the projector cabi-  
net to power on the projector.  
To use this function, first connect a computer to the projector and the projector to an active AC input.  
OFF......................... This.feature.is.disabled.  
COMPUTER.1......... Applying.an.RGB.signal.from.a.computer.connected.to.the.COMPUTER.1.IN.input.will.power.on.the.pro-  
jector.and.simultaneously.project.the.computer’s.image.  
COMPUTER.2......... Applying.an.RGB.signal.from.a.computer.connected.to.the.COMPUTER.2.IN.input.will.power.on.the.pro-  
jector.and.simultaneously.project.the.computer’s.image.  
NOTE:  
• Disconnecting an RGB signal from the computer will not power off the projector. We recommend using this function in combi-  
nation of the AUTO POWER OFF function.  
• This function will not be available under the following conditions:  
- when a component signal is applied to the COMPUTER 1 or 2 IN connector  
- when a Sync on Green RGB signal or composite sync signal is applied  
ꢀꢁꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Enabling Power Management [AUTO POWER OFF]  
When this option is selected you can enable the projector to automatically turn off (at the selected time: 5min.,  
10min., 20min., 30min.) if there is no signal received by any input.  
Enabling High Speed Fan Mode [FAN MODE]  
This option allows you to select three modes for fan speed: Auto mode, High speed mode, and High Altitude mode.  
AUTO...................... The.built-in.fans.automatically.run.at.a.variable.speed.according.to.the.internal.temperature.  
HIGH....................... The.built-in.fans.run.at.high.speed.  
HIGH.ALTITUDE...... The.built-in.fans.run.at.a.high.speed..Select.this.option.when.using.the.projector.at.altitudes.approximate-  
ly.5500.feet/1600.meters.or.higher.  
When you wish to cool down the temperature inside the projector quickly, select [HIGH].  
NOTE:  
• It is recommended that you select High speed mode if you use the projector non-stop for consecutive days.  
• Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause  
the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector.  
• Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the  
lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO].  
• Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.  
Selecting Default Source [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT]  
You can set the projector to default to any one of its inputs each time the projector is turned on.  
LAST....................... Sets.the.projector.to.default.to.the.previous.or.last.active.input.each.time.the.projector.is.turned.on.  
AUTO...................... Searches.for.an.active.source.in.order.of.COMPUTER1. .COMPUTER2. .COMPUTER3. .COMPONENT.  
.VIDEO. .S-VIDEO. .VIEWER. COMPUTER1.and.displays.the.first.found.source.  
COMPUTER.1......... Displays.the.RGB.source.from.the.COMPUTER.1.IN.connector.every.time.the.projector.is.turned.on..  
COMPUTER.2......... Displays.the.RGB.source.from.the.COMPUTER.2.IN.connector.every.time.the.projector.is.turned.on.  
COMPUTER.3......... Displays.the.RGB.source.from.the.COMPUTER.3(DVI-D).IN.connector.every.time.the.projector.is.turned.  
on..  
COMPONENT.......... Displays.the.component.source.from.the.COMPONENT.IN.connector.every.time.the.projector.is.turned.  
on.  
VIDEO..................... Displays.the.Video.source.from.the.VIDEO.IN.connector.every.time.the.projector.is.turned.on.  
S-VIDEO................. Displays.the.Video.source.from.the.S-VIDEO.IN.connector.every.time.the.projector.is.turned.on.  
VIEWER.................. Displays.slides.or.plays.back.movie.files.from.the.USB.memory.device.or.a.shared.folder.connected.to.  
LAN.every.time.the.projector.is.turned.on.  
NETWORK.............. Displays.a.signal.from.LAN.port.(RJ-45).or.the.USB.Wireless.LAN.Unit.  
Selecting Signal Format [SIGNAL SELECT]  
COMPUTER 1/2  
Allows you to set [COMPUTER 1] and [COMPUTER 2] to automatically detect an incoming RGB or component  
source such as a computer or DVD player. However there may be some RGB and component signals that the  
projector is unable to detect. In this case, select [RGB] or [COMPONENT].  
Selecting [COLOR SYSTEM]  
This feature enables you to select video standards manually.  
Normally select [AUTO]. Select the video standard from the pulldown menu. This must be done for Video and S-Vid-  
eo Connectors separately.  
ꢀꢁꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Setting MONITOR OUT Connector [OUT TERMINAL]  
This option allows you to determine which RGB or component source is output from the MONITOR OUT connector  
during Standby mode.  
LAST....................... The.signal.from.the.last.COMPUTER.1,.COMPUTER.2.or.COMPONENT.input.will.be.output.to.the.MONI-  
TOR.OUT.connector.  
COMPUTER.1,.2..... The.signal.from.the.COMPUTER.1.or.COMPUTER.2.input.will.be.output.to.the.MONITOR.OUT.connector.  
COMPONENT.......... The.signal.from.the.COMPONENT.input.will.be.output.to.the.MONITOR.OUT.connectors.  
NOTE: When [COMPUTER 1] or [COMPUTER 2] is selected for [AUTO POWER ON(COMP1/2)], the [OUT TERMINAL] feature is  
not available.  
ꢀꢁ8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]  
Displays the lamp usage hours, the status of the current signal and settings, NETWORK settings and version.  
The information included are as follows:  
[USAGE TIME]  
LAMP LIFE REMAINING (%)  
LAMP HOURS USED (H)  
FILTER HOURS USED (H)  
NOTE: The progress indicator shows the percentage of remaining lamp life. The value informs you of the amount of lamp and fil-  
ter usage respectively.  
• When the remaining lamp time reaches 0, the Lamp Life Remaining bar indicator changes from 0% to 100 Hours and the  
countdown starts.  
If lamp life remaining time reaches 0 hours, the projector will not turn on regardless of whether the lamp mode is set to Normal  
or Eco.  
The message to the effect that the lamp should be replaced will be displayed for one minute when the projector is turned on or off.  
To dismiss this message, press any button on the projector or the remote control.  
Lamp Life  
NORMAL  
2000 Hours (Min.)  
ECO  
3000 Hours (Max.)  
ꢀꢁ9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[SOURCE (1)]  
INPUT TERMINAL  
VIDEO TYPE  
ENTRY NO.  
SIGNAL TYPE  
SOURCE NAME  
[SOURCE (2)]  
HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY VERTICAL FREQUENCY  
SYNC TYPE  
SCAN TYPE  
SYNC POLARITY  
ꢀ30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[WIRED LAN]  
This page shows information on settings for the LAN port (RJ-45)  
IP.ADDRESS........... Indicates.the.IP.address.of.the.projector.when.the.LAN.port.(RJ-45).is.used.  
SUBNET.MASK....... Indicates.the.subnet.mask.of.the.projector.when.the.LAN.port.(RJ-45).is.used.  
GATEWAY............... Indicates.the.gateway.of.the.network.connected.to.the.projector.when.the.LAN.port.(RJ-45).is.used.  
MAC.ADDRESS....... Indicates.the.MAC.address.of.the.LAN.port.(RJ-45)..  
[WIRELESS LAN (1)]  
This page shows information on settings for the USB Wireless LAN unit  
IP.ADDRESS........... Indicates.the.IP.address.of.the.projector.when.the.USB.Wireless.LAN.unit.is.used.  
SUBNET.MASK....... Indicates.the.subnet.mask.of.the.projector.when.the.USB.Wireless.LAN.unit.is.used.  
GATEWAY............... Indicates.the.gateway.of.the.network.connected.to.the.projector.when.the.USB.Wireless.LAN.unit.is.used.  
MAC.ADDRESS....... Indicates.the.MAC.address.of.the.USB.Wireless.LAN.unit.  
AUTHENTICATION.... Indicates.the.current.authentication.status.  
ꢀ3ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
[WIRELESS LAN (2)]  
This page shows information on settings for WEP key for encryption.  
SSID....................... Indicates.the.identifier.(SSID).for.your.wireless.LAN.  
NETWORK.TYPE..... Indicates.that.[EASY.CONNECTION],.[INFRASTRUCTURE].or.[AD.HOC].is.selected.for.your.communica-  
tion.method.  
WEP/WPA............... Indicates.your.selected.datalength.encryption:.On.or.Off  
CHANNEL............... Indicates.the.channel.you.selected.in.the.[SITE.SURVEY]..The.channel.must.match.for.all.wireless.devices.  
communicating.on.your.wireless.LAN.  
SIGNAL.LEVEL........ Indicates.receiving.condition.of.radio.signal.level.while.you.are.using.a.wireless.LAN.connection.. .  
[VERSION (2)]  
[VERSION (1)]  
FIRMWARE  
DATA  
FIRMWARE2  
DATA2  
PRODUCT  
SERIAL NUMBER  
LAN UNIT TYPE  
LAN UNIT VERSION  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Using On-Screen Menu  
Menu Descriptions & Functions [RESET]  
Returning to Factory Default  
The Reset feature allows you to change adjustments and settings to the factory preset for sources by the following  
methods:  
[CURRENT SIGNAL]  
Resets the adjustments for the current signal to the factory preset levels.  
All the items in [ADJUST] can be reset.  
[ALL DATA]  
Reset all the adjustments and settings for all the signals to the factory preset except [ENTRY LIST], [LANGUAGE],  
[BACKGROUND], [FILTER MESSAGE], [MULTI-SCREEN COMP.], [SECURITY SETTINGS], [NETWORK SET-  
TINGS], [COMMUNICATION SPEED], [CONTROL ID], [FAN MODE], [DATE, TIME PRESET], [LAMP LIFE RE-  
MAINING], [LAMP HOURS USED] and [FILTER HOURS USED].  
[ALL DATA (INCLUDING ENTRY LIST)]  
Reset all the adjustments and settings for all the signals to the factory preset except [LANGUAGE], [BACK-  
GROUND], [FILTER MESSAGE], [MULTI-SCREEN COMP.], [SECURITY SETTINGS], [NETWORK SETTINGS],  
[COMMUNICATION SPEED], [CONTROL ID], [FAN MODE], [DATE, TIME PRESET], [LAMP LIFE REMAIN-  
ING], [LAMP HOURS USED] and [FILTER HOURS USED].  
Also deletes all the signals in the [ENTRY LIST] and returns to the factory preset.  
NOTE: Locked signals in Entry List cannot be reset.  
Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [CLEAR LAMP HOURS]  
Resets the lamp clock back to zero.  
NOTE: Elapsed time of the lamp use will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.  
NOTE: The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the  
lamp has reached the end of its life. In this condition you cannot clear the lamp hour meter on the menu. If this happens, press the  
HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero. Do this only after replacing the lamp.  
Resetting the Filter Usage Hours [CLEAR FILTER HOURS]  
Resets the filter usage back to zero.  
NOTE: Elapsed time of the filter use will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.  
ꢀ33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
7. Maintenance  
This section describes the simple maintenance procedures you should follow to clean the filters and replace the lamp.  
Cleaning or Replacing the Filter  
The air-filter sponge keeps dust and dirt from getting inside the projector and should be frequently cleaned. If the  
filter is dirty or clogged, your projector may overheat.  
NOTE: The message for filter cleaning will be displayed for one minute when the projector is turned on or off.  
To cancel the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.  
CAUTION  
Turn off the projector, turn off the main power switch and unplug the projector before replacing the filter.  
Only clean the outside of the filter cover with a vacuum cleaner.  
Do not attempt to operate the projector without the filter cover.  
To clean the air-filter:  
Vacuum the filter-through the filter cover.  
S E L E C T  
P
U
D O W N  
T
H
G
I
R
T
F I  
H
S
S
T
F
N
E
E
L
L
Filter  
To reset the filter usage time, from the menu, select [RESET]  
[CLEAR FILTER HOURS].  
(
page 133 for resetting the filter usage time)  
To replace the filter (sponge):  
CAUTION  
Replace both filters at the same time.  
Before replacing the filters, remove dust and dirt from the projector cabinet.  
The projector contains high-precision parts. Keep out dust and dirt during filter replacement.  
Do not wash the filter with water. Water will damage the filter membrane.  
Reattach the filter cover correctly. Failure to do so may cause projector malfunction.  
Preparation: Replace the lamp before replacing the filters.  
NOTE: When you replace the lamp, it is also wise to replace the filter. The filter comes in the same package with your replacement lamp.  
1. Pull to remove the filter cover.  
ꢀ34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Maintenance  
2. Gently peel off the filter (sponge) and replace it with the new one.  
3. Reinstall the filter cover.  
Slip the filter cover back until it snaps into place.  
4. Connect the supplied power cable, turn on the Main Power switch and turn on the projector.  
5. Finally, select the menu  
[RESET]  
[CLEAR FILTER HOURS] to reset the filter usage hours.  
(
page 133 for resetting the filter usage time)  
Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens  
1. Turn off the projector before cleaning.  
2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong  
detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.  
3. Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.  
R
L
L
E
E
E
S
W
F
N
S
U
O
P
T
T
S
A
T
H
P
IF  
S
T
M
A
L
B
S
U
R
IG  
H
T
O N / S T A N D B Y  
S O U R C E  
D
A U T O A D J U S T  
O
W
N
U
3 D R E F O R M  
P
S
E
L
E
C
T
T
C
E
L
E
S
P
U
3
D
R
W N  
D O  
E
F
ORM  
AUT  
O
A
D
J
U
ST  
S
OUR  
CE  
O
N
/
S
T
A
N
U
S
D
B
B
L
A
Y
M
S
P
T
A
T
P
U
S
O
T
W
H
G
E
I
R
R
  S
T
F I  
H
S
S
T
F
N
E
E
L
L
S
WIRLES  
ꢀ35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Maintenance  
Replacing the Lamp  
When the lamp reaches the end of its life, the LAMP indicator in the cabinet will blink red. Even though the lamp  
may still be working, replace the lamp to maintain the optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be  
sure to clear the lamp hour meter. ( page 133)  
CAUTION  
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off,  
wait 30 seconds, turn off the main power switch and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour for  
the lamp to cool before handling.  
DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except two lamp housing screws.You could receive an electric shock.  
Do not break the glass on the lamp housing.  
Keep finger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving finger prints on the glass surface might  
cause an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.  
The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours  
after the lamp has reached the end of its life. If this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue to use the  
lamp after the lamp reaches the end of its life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in  
the lamp case. Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact your NEC dealer  
for lamp replacement.  
To replace the lamp:  
Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement:  
Replacement lamp NP06LP  
Phillips screwdriver or equivalent  
1. Use a Philips screwdriver to push and release the tab.  
Push and pull to remove the lamp cover.  
O
N
/S  
T
A
N
U
S
D
B
B
Y
L
A
M
S
P
T
A
T
P
U
S
O
W
E
R
2
1
ꢀ3ꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Maintenance  
2. Loosen the two screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling  
condition.The two screws are not removable.  
Remove the lamp housing by holding it.  
Interlock  
NOTE: There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this interlock.  
3. Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.  
CAUTION  
Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp NP06LP.  
Order this from your NEC dealer.  
Secure it in place with the two screws.  
Be sure to tighten the screws.  
ꢀ3ꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Maintenance  
4. Reattach the lamp cover.  
Slip the lamp cover back until it snaps into place.  
ON/STA
USB  
L
A
M
STATUS  
P
POWER  
E
O
N
/S  
T
A
N
U
SB  
D
B
L
A
Y
M
S
P
T
A
P
T
U
O
S
W
E
R
1
2
5. Connect the supplied power cable, turn on the Main Power switch and turn on the projector.  
6. Finally, select the menu  
usage hours.  
[RESET]  
[CLEAR LAMP HOURS] to reset the lamp life remaining and lamp  
NOTE: When you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life, the projector  
cannot turn on and the menu is not displayed.  
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.  
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.  
ꢀ38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Using Optional Lenses  
Five optional lenses are available for the NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W. See the information described on  
this page to buy the appropriate lens for your screen size and throw distance. See page 142 for installing the lens.  
Table of Throw Distances and Screen Sizes for Optional Lenses  
[NP3250/NP2250/NP1250]  
NOTE: The values in the tables are design values and may vary.  
Screen  
Size  
STANDARD  
NP01FL  
0.8  
NP02ZL  
NP03ZL  
NP04ZL  
NP05ZL  
1.5 2.0  
1.2 1.5  
1.9 3.1  
3.0 4.8  
4.7 7.2  
(m)  
(inches)  
(m)  
(inches)  
(m)  
(inches)  
(m)  
(inches)  
(m)  
(inches)  
(m)  
(inches)  
30"  
40"  
0.89 – 1.20  
1.20 – 1.62  
1.83 – 2.45  
2.05 – 2.75  
2.21 – 2.96  
2.46 – 3.29  
2.59 – 3.46  
2.78 – 3.71  
3.09 – 4.13  
3.72 – 4.96  
4.66 – 6.21  
5.60 – 7.47  
6.23 – 8.30  
6.54 – 8.72  
7.49 – 9.97  
7.80 – 10.39  
8.43 – 11.23  
9.37 – 12.48  
0.70 – 0.92 27.5 – 36.4  
35.1 – 47.3  
0.95 – 1.25 37.3 – 49.1 1.56 – 2.51  
1.44 – 1.89 56.9 – 74.5 2.37 – 3.79  
1.62 – 2.12 63.7 – 83.4 2.66 – 4.25  
1.74 – 2.28 68.6 – 89.8 2.86 – 4.57  
1.94 – 2.54 76.4 – 99.9 3.19 – 5.08  
2.04 – 2.67 80.3 – 105.0 3.35 – 5.34  
2.19 – 2.86 86.2 – 112.6 3.60 – 5.73  
2.44 – 3.18 96.0 – 125.4 4.01 – 6.37  
2.93 – 3.83 115.5 – 150.8 4.82 – 7.66  
3.68 – 4.80 144.9 – 188.9 6.05 – 9.59  
4.42 – 5.77 174.2 – 227.1 7.27 – 11.53  
4.92 – 6.41 193.8 – 252.5 8.08 – 12.81  
5.17 – 6.74 203.5 – 265.2 8.49 – 13.46  
5.91 – 7.71 232.9 – 303.4 9.72 – 15.39  
6.16 – 8.03 242.7 – 316.1 10.12 – 16.04  
6.66 – 8.67 262.2 – 341.5 10.94 – 17.33  
7.41 – 9.64 291.5 – 379.7 12.16 – 19.26  
9.89 – 12.87 389.3 – 506.8 16.24 – 25.70  
12.37 – 16.10 487.1 – 634.0 20.32 – 32.15  
61.4 – 98.6  
47.4 – 63.8 0.64  
72.2 – 96.6 0.98  
80.8 – 108.2 1.10  
87.0 – 116.4 1.18  
96.9 – 129.5 1.32  
101.8 – 136.1 1.39  
109.3 – 146.0 1.49  
121.6 – 162.4 1.66  
146.3 – 195.3 2.00  
183.4 – 244.6 2.50  
220.5 – 294.0  
25.3  
38.6  
43.3  
46.6  
51.9  
54.6  
58.6  
65.3  
78.6  
98.6  
60"  
93.5 – 149.4 3.60 – 5.83 141.7 – 229.7 5.69 – 8.75 224.1 – 344.6  
104.7 – 167.1 4.03 – 6.53 158.8 – 257.0 6.38 – 9.80 251.1 – 385.7  
112.8 – 179.8 4.34 – 7.03 171.1 – 276.6 6.87 – 10.54 270.4 – 415.0  
125.6 – 200.1 4.84 – 7.82 190.6 – 307.9 7.65 – 11.73 301.3 – 462.0  
132.0 – 210.3 5.09 – 8.22 200.4 – 323.5 8.05 – 12.33 316.8 – 485.5  
141.7 – 225.5 5.46 – 8.81 215.0 – 346.9 8.63 – 13.23 340.0 – 520.7  
157.7 – 250.8 6.08 – 9.81 239.5 – 386.0 9.62 – 14.72 378.6 – 579.4  
189.8 – 301.6 7.32 – 11.79 288.3 – 464.2 11.58 – 17.70 455.8 – 696.8  
238.0 – 377.7 9.18 – 14.77 361.6 – 581.5 14.52 – 22.17 571.7 – 872.9  
286.2 – 453.8 11.05 – 17.75 434.9 – 698.7 17.46 – 26.65 687.5 –1049.0  
318.3 – 504.5 12.29 – 19.73 483.8 – 776.9 19.43 – 29.63 764.8 –1166.4  
334.3 – 529.9 12.91 – 20.73 508.2 – 816.0 20.41 – 31.12 803.4 –1225.1  
382.5 – 606.0 14.77 – 23.70 581.5 – 933.3 23.35 – 35.59 919.3 –1401.2  
398.6 – 631.4 15.39 – 24.70 605.9 – 972.4 24.33 – 37.08 957.9 –1459.9  
430.7 – 682.1 16.63 – 26.68 654.8 –1050.5 26.29 – 40.06 1035.1–1577.3  
478.8 – 758.2 18.49 – 29.66 728.1 –1167.8 29.23 – 44.54 1151.0–1753.5  
639.4 –1011.9 24.70 – 39.59 972.4 –1558.7 39.04 – 59.45 1537.2–2340.5  
799.9 –1265.6 30.90 – 49.52 1216.7–1949.5 48.85 – 74.36 1923.4–2927.5  
67"  
72"  
80"  
84"  
90"  
100"  
120"  
150"  
180"  
200"  
210"  
240"  
250"  
270"  
300"  
245.3 – 326.9  
257.6 – 343.3  
294.7 – 392.6  
307.1 – 409.1  
331.8 – 442.0  
368.9 – 491.3  
400" 12.51 – 16.66  
500" 15.65 – 20.83  
492.5 – 655.8  
616.2 – 820.2  
For screen sizes between 30" and 500" not indicated on the above table, use formulas below.  
Throw distance for Standard lens (m/inch)=H × 1.5 through H × 2.0 Distance from 0.89 m to 20.83 m/35.1" to 820.2"  
Throw distance for NP01FL(m/inch)=H × 0.8 Distance from 0.64m to 2.5 m/25.3" to 98.6"  
Throw distance for NP02ZL(m/inch)=H × 1.2 through H × 1.5 Distance from 0.7 m to 16.1 m/27.5" to 634"  
Throw distance for NP03ZL(m/inch)=H × 1.9 through H × 3.1 Distance from 1.56 m to 32.15 m/61.4" to 1265.6"  
Throw distance for NP04ZL(m/inch)=H × 3.0 through H × 4.8 Distance from 3.6 m to 49.52 m/141.7" to 1949.5"  
Throw distance for NP05ZL(m/inch)=H × 4.7 through H × 7.2 Distance from 5.69 m to 74.36 m/224.1" to 2927.5"  
“H”= Screen width  
NP04ZL (H X 3.0) - (H X 4.8)  
STANDARD (H X 1.5) - (H X 2.0)  
NP01FL (H X 0.8)  
NP02ZL (H X 1.2) - (H X 1.5)  
NP03ZL (H X 1.9) - (H X 3.1)  
NP05ZL (H X 4.7) - (H X 7.2)  
Example: Distance from a ꢀ00" screen with the lens NP03ZL  
Referring to the diagram on page 154, “H” is 2.0 m/78.7". Therefore, the projection distances of 100 inches are from  
2.0 m/78.7" × 1.9 to 2.0 m/78.7" × 3.1 = from 3.8 m/150" to 6.2 m/244".  
ꢀ39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8. Using Optional Lenses  
[NP3250W]  
NOTE: The values in the tables are design values and may vary.  
Screen  
Size  
STANDARD  
1.5 2.0  
NP01FL  
0.8  
NP02ZL  
NP03ZL  
NP04ZL  
NP05ZL  
1.2 1.5  
1.9 3.1  
3.0 4.8  
4.7 7.2  
(m)  
(inches)  
(m)  
(inches)  
(m)  
(inches)  
(m)  
(inches)  
(m)  
(inches)  
(m)  
(inches)  
30"  
40"  
0.94 – 1.27  
1.27 – 1.71  
1.93 – 2.58  
2.16 – 2.89  
2.33 – 3.11  
2.59 – 3.46  
2.72 – 3.64  
2.92 – 3.9  
0.74 – 0.97 29.1 – 38.3  
37.0 – 49.8  
1.00 – 1.31 39.3 – 51.7 1.64 – 2.64  
1.52 – 1.99 59.9 – 78.4 2.50 – 3.99  
1.70 – 2.23 67.1 – 87.8 2.80 – 4.47  
1.83 – 2.40 72.2 – 94.5 3.02 – 4.81  
2.04 – 2.67 80.5 – 105.2 3.36 – 5.35  
2.15 – 2.81 84.6 – 110.5 3.53 – 5.62  
2.30 – 3.01 90.7 – 118.5 3.79 – 6.03  
2.57 – 3.35 101.0 – 131.9 4.22 – 6.70  
3.09 – 4.03 121.6 – 158.6 5.07 – 8.06  
3.87 – 5.05 152.4 – 198.8 6.36 – 10.09  
4.66 – 6.07 183.3 – 238.9 7.65 – 12.12  
5.18 – 6.75 203.8 – 265.6 8.50 – 13.48  
5.44 – 7.09 214.1 – 279.0 8.93 – 14.16  
6.22 – 8.10 245.0 – 319.1 10.22 – 16.19  
6.77 – 8.82 266.6 – 347.2 11.12 – 17.61  
7.01 – 9.12 275.8 – 359.2 11.51 – 18.22  
7.79 – 10.14 306.7 – 399.3 12.79 – 20.25  
9.09 – 11.84 358.1 – 466.2 14.94 – 23.64  
10.40 – 13.54 409.5 – 533.0 17.08 – 27.03  
11.71 – 15.24 460.9 – 599.9 19.22 – 30.42  
13.01 – 16.93 512.3 – 666.7 21.37 – 33.80  
64.7 – 103.9  
50.0 – 67.1 0.68  
76.0 – 101.7 1.03  
85.1 – 113.8 1.16  
91.6 – 122.5 1.25  
102.0 – 136.3 1.39  
107.2 – 143.2 1.46  
115.0 – 153.6 1.57  
128.0 – 170.9 1.74  
154.0 – 205.5 2.10  
26.7  
40.7  
45.6  
49.1  
54.7  
57.5  
61.7  
68.7  
82.7  
60"  
98.5 – 157.2 3.79 – 6.14 149.3 – 241.8 6.00 – 9.21 236.0 – 362.7  
110.3 – 175.9 4.25 – 6.87 167.3 – 270.5 6.72 – 10.31 264.5 – 405.9  
118.7 – 189.2 4.57 – 7.39 180.1 – 291.1 7.23 – 11.09 284.8 – 436.8  
132.2 – 210.6 5.10 – 8.23 200.7 – 324.0 8.06 – 12.35 317.2 – 486.2  
139.0 – 221.2 5.36 – 8.65 210.9 – 340.4 8.47 – 12.98 333.5 – 510.9  
149.1 – 237.2 5.75 – 9.27 226.4 – 365.1 9.09 – 13.92 357.9 – 547.9  
166.0 – 263.9 6.40 – 10.32 252.0 – 406.2 10.12 – 15.48 398.5 – 609.6  
199.8 – 317.3 7.71 – 12.40 303.4 – 488.4 12.18 – 18.62 479.7 – 733.1  
250.4 – 397.3 9.66 – 15.54 380.5 – 611.7 15.28 – 23.32 601.5 – 918.3  
301.1 – 477.3 11.62 – 18.67 457.5 – 735.0 18.37 – 28.03 723.3 –1103.5  
334.8 – 530.7 12.93 – 20.76 508.9 – 817.2 20.44 – 31.16 804.6 –1226.9  
351.7 – 557.3 13.58 – 21.80 534.6 – 858.3 21.47 – 32.73 845.2 –1288.6  
402.3 – 637.4 15.54 – 24.93 611.7 – 981.6 24.56 – 37.43 967.0 –1473.8  
437.8 – 693.4 16.91 – 27.12 665.6 –1067.9 26.73 – 40.73 1052.3–1603.4  
453.0 – 717.4 17.49 – 28.06 688.7 –1104.9 27.66 – 42.14 1088.8–1659.0  
503.6 – 797.4 19.45 – 31.20 765.8 –1228.2 30.75 – 46.84 1210.7–1844.2  
588.1 – 930.8 22.71 – 36.42 894.3 –1433.7 35.91 – 54.68 1413.7–2152.8  
672.5 –1064.2 25.98 – 41.64 1022.7–1639.2 41.07 – 62.52 1616.8–2461.5  
756.9 –1197.5 29.24 – 46.86 1151.1–1844.7 46.22 – 70.36 1819.8–2770.1  
841.3 –1330.9 32.50 – 52.08 1279.6–2050.2 51.38 – 78.20 2022.9–3078.7  
67"  
72"  
80"  
84"  
90"  
100"  
120"  
150"  
180"  
200"  
210"  
240"  
261"  
270"  
300"  
350"  
400"  
450"  
500"  
3.25 – 4.34  
3.91 – 5.22  
4.90 – 6.54  
5.89 – 7.85  
6.55 – 8.73  
6.88 – 9.17  
7.87 – 10.49  
8.57 – 11.41  
8.86 – 11.81  
9.86 – 13.12  
11.51 – 15.32  
13.16 – 17.52  
14.81 – 19.71  
16.46 – 21.91  
193.0 – 257.4 2.63 103.7  
232.0 – 309.2  
258.0 – 343.8  
271.0 – 361.1  
310.0 – 413.0  
337.3 – 449.3  
349.0 – 464.9  
388.0 – 516.7  
453.0 – 603.2  
518.0 – 689.6  
583.0 – 776.1  
648.0 – 862.6  
For screen sizes between 30" and 500" not indicated on the above table, use formulas below.  
Throw distance for Standard lens (m/inch)=H × 1.5 through H × 2.0 Distance from 0.94 m to 21.91 m/37" to 862.6"  
Throw distance for NP01FL(m/inch)=H × 0.8 Distance from 0.68 m to 2.63 m/26.7" to 103.7"  
Throw distance for NP02ZL(m/inch)=H × 1.2 through H × 1.5 Distance from 0.7 m to 16.9 m/29.1" to 666.7"  
Throw distance for NP03ZL(m/inch)=H × 1.9 through H × 3.1 Distance from 1.63 m to 33.8 m/64.7" to 1330.9"  
Throw distance for NP04ZL(m/inch)=H × 3.0 through H × 4.8 Distance from 3.79 m to 52 m/149.3" to 2050.2"  
Throw distance for NP05ZL(m/inch)=H × 4.7 through H × 7.2 Distance from 6.0 m to 78.2 m/236" to 3078.7"  
“H”= Screen width  
NP04ZL (H X 3.0) - (H X 4.8)  
STANDARD (H X 1.5) - (H X 2.0)  
NP01FL (H X 0.8)  
NP02ZL (H X 1.2) - (H X 1.5)  
NP03ZL (H X 1.9) - (H X 3.1)  
NP05ZL (H X 4.7) - (H X 7.2)  
Example: Distance from a ꢀ00" screen with the lens NP03ZL  
Referring to the diagram on page 155, “H” is 2.2 m/84.8". Therefore, the projection distances of 100 inches are from  
2.2 m/84.8" × 1.9 to 2.2 m/84.8" × 3.1 = from 4.18 m/164.6" to 6.82 m/268.5".  
ꢀ40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Using Optional Lenses  
Lens Shift Adjustable Range  
The top right diagram shows the location of the image position in the lens. The lens can be shifted within the shad-  
ed area as shown using the normal projection position as a starting point.  
The projector has a lens shift feature that allows you to move the image vertically or horizontally.  
NOTE: Lens shift is not available with the NP01FL optional lens. The NP01FL should be used only for “zero degree” applications.  
Desktop front projection  
Normal projection  
1V  
Position  
Vertical shift  
Max. 0.5V 0.5V  
0.1H  
1H  
0.1H  
Width of projected image  
Ceiling front projection  
Vertical shift  
Shift to left  
Shift to right  
Max.  
0.5V  
1V  
ꢀ4ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8. Using Optional Lenses  
Replacing with Optional Lens  
CAUTION  
Do not give a shock or excessive load to the projector or the lens components as the projector and lens compo-  
nents contain precision parts.  
When shipping the projector with the optional lens, remove the optional lens before shipping the projector. The  
lens and the lens shift mechanism may encounter damage caused by improper handling during transportation.  
Before removing or installing the lens, be sure to turn off the projector, wait until the cooling fans stop, and turn  
off the main power switch.  
Do not touch the lens surface when removing or installing the lens.  
Keep fingerprints, dust or oil off the lens surface. Do not scratch the lens surface.  
Work on a level surface with a soft cloth under it to avoid scratching.  
If you remove and store the lens, attach the lens cap to the projector to keep off dust and dirt.  
Please heed the following information if you own two or more NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W projectors  
and may interchange the standard lenses.  
When replacing the standard lens (with an optional lens) and then re-installing the standard lens back into the  
projector, the standard lens must go back to its original projector from which it was removed.  
If you remove the standard lens from one NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W projector and re-install it into an-  
other NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W projector, performance may be compromised.  
Be sure to use the standard lens in combination with its original factory-adjusted projector.  
LENS RELEASE  
Button  
Remove the existing lens from the projector.  
T
C
E
L
E
S
P
U
1. Rotate the lens counterclockwise while strongly pushing the  
LENS RELEASE button all the way in.  
N
W
O
D
T
R I G H  
L E F T  
The existing lens will be disengaged.  
NOTE: If the lens cannot be removed even by using the LENS RELEASE but-  
ton, the anti-theft screw for lens may be used to secure the lens.  
If such is the case, remove the anti-theft screw first. ( page 143)  
2. Pull out the existing lens slowly.  
R
E
S
W
U
O
P
T
A
D
P
T
S
R
M
A
A
L
C
Y
B
C
P
D
N
A
T
S /  
N
O
E
C
R
U
O
S
T
S
U
J
D
A
O
T
U
A
M
R
O
F
E
R
D
3
T
C
E
L
E
S
P
U
N
W
O
D
R I G H T  
L E F T  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8. Using Optional Lenses  
Install the new lens  
1. Insert the lens with the yellow protrusion on top.  
T
R I G H  
L E F T  
Yellow  
Protrusion  
2. Rotate the lens clockwise.  
T
C
E
L
E
P
S
U
N
W
O
D
Rotate the lens until you feel it click into place.  
T
R I G H  
L E F T  
Using the anti-theft screw to prevent theft of the lens  
Tighten the supplied anti-theft screw on the front bottom.  
Hole of anti-theft screw for lens unit  
ꢀ43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Appendix  
Troubleshooting  
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.  
Indicator Messages  
Power Indicator  
Indicator Condition  
Projector Condition  
The.main.power.is.off  
The.projector.is.getting.ready.to.turn.on. Wait.for.a.moment.  
Note  
Off  
Blinking.light  
Green  
0.5.sec.On,  
0.5.sec.Off  
2.5.sec.On,  
0.5.sec.Off  
0.5.sec.On,  
0.5.sec.Off  
2.5.sec.On,  
0.5.sec.Off  
Off.Timer.(Off.Time).is.activated.  
The.projector.is.cooling.down.  
The.Program.Timer.is.activated.  
Orange  
Wait.for.a.moment.  
Steady.light  
Green  
Orange  
The.projector.is.turned.on.  
The.projector.is.in.Standby.  
Status Indicator  
Indicator Condition  
Off  
Projector Condition  
Note  
Normal  
Blinking.light  
Red  
1.cycle.(0.5.sec.On,. Lamp.cover.error  
Reattach.the.lamp.cover.correctly.  
.page.138)  
2.5.sec.Off)  
(
2.cycle.(0.5.sec.On,. Temperature.error  
0.5.sec.Of)  
4.cycle.(0.5.sec.On,. Fan.error  
0.5.sec.Off)  
The.projector.is.overheated..Move.  
the.projector.to.a.cooler.location.  
Fans.will.not.work.correctly.  
6.cycle.(0.5.sec.On,. Lamp.error  
0.5.sec.Off)  
Lamp.fails.to.light..Wait.a.full.  
minute.and.then.turn.on.again.  
The.projector.is.re-firing.  
Green  
Re-firing.the.lamp  
Orange  
1.cycle.(0.5.sec.On,. Network.conflict.  
Both.the.built-in.wired.LAN.and.the.  
wireless.LAN.cannot.be.connected.to.  
the.same.network.at.the.same.time.  
To.use.both.built-in.wired.LAN.and.  
wireless.LAN.at.the.same.time,.con-  
nect.them.to.different.networks.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
2.5.sec.Off)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.page.113,.114)  
.
(
Steady.light  
Orange  
Control.Panel.Lock.is.on  
You.have.pressed.cabinet.button.  
when.Control.Panel.Lock.is.on.  
(
.page.119)  
Green  
The.projector.is.in.Standby.  
Lamp Indicator  
Indicator Condition  
Projector Condition  
Note  
Off  
Normal  
Lamp.has.reached.its.end.of.life..Lamp. Replace.the.lamp.  
Red  
Blinking.light  
Steady.light  
.page.136)  
replacement.message.will.be.displayed.  
(
Lamp.has.been.used.beyond.its.limit.. Replace.the.lamp.  
Red  
The.projector.will.not.turn.on.until.the. ( .page.136)  
lamp.is.replaced.  
Lamp.is.in.Eco.mode  
Green  
Over-Temperature Protection  
If the temperature inside the projector rises too high, the over-temperature protector will automatically turn off the lamp with the  
STATUS indicator blinking (2-cycle On and Off.)  
Should this happen, do the following:  
• Unplug the power cable after the cooling fans stop.  
• Move the projector to a cooler location if the room where you are presenting is particularly too warm.  
• Clean the ventilation holes if they are clogged with dust.  
• Wait about 60 minutes until the inside of the projector becomes cool enough.  
ꢀ44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
9. Appendix  
Common Problems & Solutions ( “Power/Status/Lamp Indicator” on page 144)  
Problem  
Check These Items  
•. Check.that.the.power.cable.is.plugged.in.and.that.the.power.button.on.the.projector.cabinet.or.the.remote.  
Does.not.turn.on  
control.is.on..( .page.22,.23)  
•. Ensure.that.the.lamp.cover.is.installed.correctly..( .page.138)  
•. Check.to.see.if.the.projector.has.overheated..If.there.is.insufficient.ventilation.around.the.projector.or.if.the.  
room.where.you.are.presenting.is.particularly.warm,.move.the.projector.to.a.cooler.location.  
•. Check.to.see.if.you.continue.to.use.the.projector.for.another.100.hours.after.the.lamp.has.reached.the.end.  
of.its.life..If.so,.replace.the.lamp.  
.
After.replacing.the.lamp,.reset.the.lamp.hours.used..( .page.133)  
•. The.lamp.may.fail.to.light..Wait.a.full.minute.and.then.turn.on.the.power.again.  
•. Set.[FAN.MODE].to.[HIGH.ALTITUDE].when.using.the.projector.at.altitudes.approximately.5500.feet/1600.  
meters.or.higher..Using.the.projector.at.altitudes.approximately.5500.feet/1600.meters.or.higher.without.  
setting.to.[HIGH.ALTITUDE].can.cause.the.projector.to.overheat.and.the.projector.could.shut.down..If.this.  
happens,.wait.a.couple.minutes.and.turn.on.the.projector..( .page.127)  
.
Also.when.the.lamp.is.turned.off,.the.projector.internal.temperature.is.hot..If.the.power.is.turned.on.before.  
the.projector.has.cooled.down,.the.fan.will.run.a.short.time.before.the.lamp.will.turn.on.  
Will.turn.off  
No.picture  
•. Ensure.that.the.[OFF.TIMER],.[PROGRAM.TIMER].or.[AUTO.POWER.OFF].is.off..( .page.101,.127)  
•. Use.the.SOURCE.button.on.the.projector.cabinet.or.the.VIDEO,.the.S-VIDEO,.the.COMPUTER.1,.the.COM-  
PUTER.2,.the.COMPUTER.3,.the.COMPONENT,.the.VIEWER.or.the.NETWORK.button.on.the.remote.control.  
to.select.your.source..( .page.25)  
•. Ensure.your.cables.are.connected.properly.  
•. Use.menus.to.adjust.the.brightness.and.contrast..( .page.90)  
•. Check.to.see.if.the.image.is.muted..( .page.35)  
•. Remove.the.lens.cap.  
•. Reset.the.settings.or.adjustments.to.factory.preset.levels.using.the.Reset.in.the.Menu..( .page.133)  
•. Enter.your.registered.keyword.if.the.Security.function.is.enabled..( .page.45)  
•. Be.sure.to.connect.the.projector.and.notebook.PC.while.the.projector.is.in.standby.mode.and.before.turn-  
ing.on.the.power.to.the.notebook.PC.  
.
In.most.cases.the.output.signal.from.the.notebook.PC.is.not.turned.on.unless.connected.to.the.projector.  
before.being.powered.up.  
*. If.the.screen.goes.blank.while.using.your.remote.control,.it.may.be.the.result.of.the.computer’s.screen-  
saver.or.power.management.software.  
•. See.also.the.next.page.  
Color.tone.or.hue.is.  
unusual  
•. Check.if.an.appropriate.color.is.selected.in.[WALL.COLOR]..If.not,.select.an.appropriate.option..( .page.  
100)  
•. Adjust.[HUE].in.[ADJUST]..( .page.90)  
Image.isn’t.square.to.  
the.screen  
•. Reposition.the.projector.to.improve.its.angle.to.the.screen..( .page.26)  
•. Use.the.3DReform.function.to.correct.the.trapezoid.distortion..( .page.30)  
Picture.is.blurred  
•. Adjust.the.focus..( .page.28)  
•. Reposition.the.projector.to.improve.its.angle.to.the.screen..( .page.26)  
•. Ensure.that.the.distance.between.the.projector.and.screen.is.within.the.adjustment.range.of.the.lens..(  
page.139,.140,.141)  
.
•. Condensation.may.form.on.the.lens.if.the.projector.is.cold,.brought.into.a.warm.place.and.is.then.turned.  
on..Should.this.happen,.let.the.projector.stand.until.there.is.no.condensation.on.the.lens.  
Flicker.appears.on.  
screen  
•. Set.[FAN.MODE].to.other.than.[HIGH.ALTITUDE].mode.when.using.the.projector.at.altitudes.approximately.  
5500.feet/1600.meters.or.lower..Using.the.projector.at.altitudes.less.than.approximately.5500.feet/1600.  
meters.and.setting.to.[HIGH.ALTITUDE].can.cause.the.lamp.to.overcool,.causing.the.image.to.flicker..  
Switch.[FAN.MODE].to.[AUTO]..( .page.127)  
Image.is.scrolling.  
vertically,.horizontally.or.  
both  
•. Use.the.SOURCE.button.on.the.projector.cabinet.or.the.VIDEO,.the.S-VIDEO,.the.COMPUTER.1,.the.COM-  
PUTER.2,.the.COMPUTER.3,.the.COMPONENT,.the.VIEWER.or.the.NETWORK.button.on.the.remote.control.  
to.select.your.source.(Video,.S-Video,.Computer,.Component,.Viewer.or.NETWORK)..( .page.25)  
•. Adjust.the.computer.image.manually.with.the.[CLOCK]/[PHASE].in.[ADJUST]. .[IMAGE.OPTIONS]..( .page.91)  
Remote.control.does.  
not.work  
•. Install.new.batteries..( .page.10)  
•. Make.sure.there.are.no.obstacles.between.you.and.the.projector.  
•. Stand.within.22.feet.(7.m).of.the.projector..( .page.10)  
•. Check.if.one.or.more.remote.sensors.are.enabled..Select.[SETUP]. .[INSTALLATION(2)]. .[REMOTE.  
SENSOR].from.the.menu..See.page.124.  
•. If.the.remote.control.cable.plug.is.inserted.into.the.REMOTE.mini.jack,.the.remote.control.does.not.function.  
wirelessly..See.page.11.  
•. Make.sure.that.the.remote.control’s.ID.corresponds.with.the.projector’s.ID.  
•. Selecting.[ON].for.[CONTROL.ID].will.not.make.the.remote.control.supplied.with.the.projector.inoperable.  
Indicator.is.lit.or.blinking •. See.the.POWER/STATUS/LAMP.Indicator..( .page.144)  
.
Vertical.stripes.in.RGB.  
mode  
•. Press.the.AUTO.ADJUST.button.on.the.projector.cabinet.or.the.AUTO.ADJ..button.on.the.remote.control..(  
page.32)  
•. Adjust.the.computer.image.manually.with.the.[CLOCK]/[PHASE].in.[ADJUST]. .[IMAGE.OPTIONS]..( .page.91)  
USB.mouse.does.not.  
work  
•. Make.sure.that.your.USB.mouse.is.properly.connected.to.the.projector..( .page.37)  
The.projector.may.not.support.some.brands.of.a.USB.mouse.  
•. Some.menu.items.cannot.be.operated.with.a.USB.mouse.  
.
For more information contact your dealer.  
ꢀ45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Appendix  
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.  
Power on process for the projector and the PC.  
Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on  
the power to the notebook PC.  
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before  
being powered up.  
NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projector’s menu [SOURCE(2)] under Information.  
If it reads “0kHz”, this means there is no signal being output from the computer. See page 130 or go to next step.  
Enabling the computer’s external display.  
Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projec-  
tor. When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.  
Usually, the combination of the “Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come  
on or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle  
through external display selections.  
Non-standard signal output from the computer  
If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed  
correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PC’s LCD screen when the projector display is in use.  
Each notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the previ-  
ous step. Refer to your computer’s documentation for detailed information.  
Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh  
When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIP switch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projec-  
tor) according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect.  
For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP  
switch on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP  
switch to the 13" fixed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a display-  
able mode and then restart the Macintosh again.  
NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Inc. is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub  
15-pin connector.  
Mirroring on a PowerBook  
* When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 × 768 unless “mirroring”  
is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owner’s manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring.  
Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen  
Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View]  
menu and arrange icons.  
[Arrange] from the Apple  
ꢀ4ꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Appendix  
Specifications  
This section provides technical information about the projector’s performance.  
Model Number  
NP3250/NP2250/NP1250/NP3250W  
Optical  
LCD Panel  
NP3250/NP2250/NP1250: 0.8" p-Si TFT active-matrix with Micro Lens  
Array (Aspect ratio 4:3)  
NP3250W: 0.74" p-Si TFT active-matrix with Micro Lens Array (Aspect  
ratio 16:10)  
NP3250/NP2250/NP1250: 1024 × 768 pixels*¹ up to UXGA with scaling  
technology (up to 1400 × 1050 @ 60 Hz on DVI-D)  
NP3250W: 1280 × 800 pixels*¹ up to UXGA with scaling technology (up  
to 1400 × 1050 @ 60 Hz on DVI-D)  
Resolution  
Standard Lens  
Lamp  
Manual zoom and focus:  
F1.7–2.2 f=24.4–32.5 mm  
NP3250/NP3250W : 330W AC (264 W in Eco mode)  
NP2250/NP1250 : 300W AC (264W in Eco mode)  
NP3250 : 5000 lumens (approx.80% in Eco)  
NP2250 : 4200 lumens (approx.88% in Eco)  
NP1250 : 3700 lumens (approx.88% in Eco)  
NP3250W : 4000 lumens (approx.80% in Eco)  
,
Light Output*² *³  
Contrast Ratio*³ (full white: full black) NP3250/NP2250/NP1250: 600:1  
NP3250W: 500:1  
Image Size (Standard lens)  
Lens Options  
30"–500" (0.76 m–12.7 m) diagonal  
Fixed lens : NP01FL (throw ratio 0.8:1)  
Zoom lens : NP02ZL (throw ratio 1.2–1.5:1)  
NP03ZL (throw ratio 1.9–3.1:1)  
NP04ZL (throw ratio 3.0–4.8:1)  
NP05ZL (throw ratio 4.7–7.2:1)  
Lens Shift : Vertical +/− 0.5V, Horizontal +/− 0.1H  
*1 Effective pixels are more than 99.99%.  
*2 This is the light output value (lumens) when the [PRESET] mode is set to [HIGH-BRIGHT]. If any other mode is selected as the  
[PRESET] mode, the light output value may drop slightly.  
*3 Compliance with ISO21118-2005  
Electrical  
Inputs  
1 Analog RGB (Mini D-Sub 15 P), 1 Analog RGB R/Cr, G/Y, B/Cb, H, V  
(BNC × 5), 1 Digital RGB (DVI-D 24 P, HDCP supported), 1 Component  
Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr (RCA × 3), 1 Component (Mini D-Sub 15 P) shared with  
COMPUTER 1 IN, 1 S-Video (Mini DIN 4P), 1 Video, 3 Stereo Mini Au-  
dio, 2 (L/R) RCA Audio, 1 Remote Control (Stereo Mini)  
1 RGB (Mini D-Sub 15P), 1 Stereo Mini Audio  
1 PC Control Port (D-Sub 9P)  
Outputs  
PC Control  
USB Port  
LAN Port  
Wireless LAN  
Video Compatibility  
1 A Type  
RJ-45  
USB  
NTSC, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL60, PAL-N, PAL-M, SECAM,  
DTV: 480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p (60Hz)  
576i, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p (50Hz)  
DVD: Progressive (50/60Hz)  
Horizontal: 15 kHz to 108 kHz (RGB: 24 kHz or over)  
Vertical: 48 Hz to 120 Hz  
Scan Rate  
Video Bandwidth  
Color Reproduction  
RGB: 165MHz (Maximum sampling rate)  
10-bit signal processing (1.07 billion colors)  
(COMPUTER3, VIEWER, NETWORK: Colors, 16.7 million colors)  
NTSC / NTSC4.43 / PAL / PAL-M / PAL-N / PAL60: 540 TV lines  
SECAM: 300 TV lines  
Horizontal Resolution  
RGB: 1024 dots (H) × 768 dots (V)  
ꢀ4ꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Appendix  
External Control  
Sync Compatibility  
Built-in Speakers  
Power Requirement  
Input Current  
RS232, IR, LAN, USB  
Separate Sync / Composite Sync / Sync on G  
5W × 2  
100–240V AC, 50/60Hz  
NP3250/NP3250W : 5.9–2.3A  
NP2250/NP1250 : 5.5–2.2A  
NP3250/NP3250W : 490W in Lamp Normal mode  
NP2250/NP1250 : 460W in Lamp Normal mode  
Power Consumption  
NP3250/NP3250W/NP2250/NP1250 : 410W in Lamp Eco mode/26W in  
Standby  
Mechanical  
Installation  
Dimensions  
Orientation: Desktop/Front, Desktop/Rear, Ceiling/Front, Ceiling/Rear  
15.7" (W) × 5.9" (H) × 14.1" (D)  
399 mm (W) × 150.5 mm (H) × 358 mm (D)  
(not including protrusions)  
16.1 lbs/7.3 kg  
Weight  
Environmental Considerations  
Operational Temperatures :  
41° to 104°F / 5° to 40°C,  
(Eco mode selected automatically at 95° to 104°F/35° to 40°C), 20% to  
80% humidity (non-condensing)  
Storage Temperatures :  
Regulations  
14° to 122°F (−10° to 50°C), 20% to 80% humidity  
(non-condensing)  
UL/C-UL Approved (UL 60950-1, CSA 60950-1)  
Meets DOC Canada Class B requirements  
Meets FCC Class B requirements  
Meets AS/NZS CISPR.22 Class B  
Meets EMC Directive (EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3)  
Meets Low Voltage Directive (EN60950-1, TÜV GS Approved)  
For additional information visit:  
For information on our optional accessories, visit our website or see our brochure.  
The specifications are subject to change without notice.  
USB Wireless LAN Unit  
For United States, Canada, and Mexico  
Product Name  
Operating Voltage  
MAX Amps  
NP01LM3  
5V (power supplied from the projector)  
Tx: 472 mA(Max)  
Rx: 300 mA(Max)  
Wireless Standard  
Modulation Method  
LED Display (Blue)  
IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g  
CCK/DQPSK/DBPSK/OFDM  
During communication: blinking  
Standby: slow blinking  
No operation: light off  
IEEE802.11a  
Center Frequency Range/  
Operating channels  
5150 to 5350, 5725 to 5850 MHz  
36,40,44,48,52,56,60,64,149,153,157,161,165 channels  
OFDM method (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing method)  
54/48/36/24/18/12/9/6 (Mbps)  
Transmission method  
Data Rates  
IEEE802.11b  
Center Frequency Range/  
Operating channels  
2412 to 2462 MHz  
ꢀ48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Appendix  
1 to 11 channels  
DS-SS method (direct dispersion spectrum dispersion method)  
11/5.5/2/1 (Mbps)  
Transmission method  
Data Rates  
IEEE802.11g  
Center Frequency Range/  
Operating channels  
2412 to 2462 MHz  
1 to 11 channels  
Transmission method  
Data Rates  
OFDM method (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing method)  
54/48/36/24/18/12/9/6 (Mbps)  
Interface  
USB 2.0 (connected to USB wireless LAN port on the projector)  
Dimensions  
Width:1.1"/28 mm  
Height:0.43"/11 mm  
Length:3.03"/77 mm  
0.042 lbs/19 g  
Weight  
Environmental Considerations Operational Temperatures :  
41° to 104°F / 5° to 40°C, 20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)  
Storage Temperatures :  
14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C), 20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)  
For other countries except United States, Canada and Mexico  
Product Name  
Operating Voltage  
MAX Amps  
NP01LM2  
5V (power supplied from the projector)  
Tx: 472 mA(Max)  
Rx: 300 mA(Max)  
Wireless Standard  
Modulation Method  
LED Display (Blue)  
IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g  
CCK/DQPSK/DBPSK/OFDM  
During communication: blinking  
Standby: slow blinking  
No operation: light off  
IEEE802.11a  
Center Frequency Range/  
Operating channels  
5150 to 5250, 5250 to 5350, 5470 to 5725 MHz  
36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128,  
132, 136, 140 channels  
Transmission method  
Data Rates  
OFDM method (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing method)  
54/48/36/24/18/12/9/6 (Mbps)  
IEEE802.11b  
Center Frequency Range/  
Operating channels  
2412 to 2472 MHz  
1 to 13 channels  
Transmission method  
Data Rates  
DS-SS method (direct dispersion spectrum dispersion method)  
11/5.5/2/1 (Mbps)  
IEEE802.11g  
Center Frequency Range/  
Operating channels  
2412 to 2472 MHz  
1 to 13 channels  
Transmission method  
Data Rates  
OFDM method (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing method)  
54/48/36/24/18/12/9/6 (Mbps)  
Interface  
USB 2.0 (connected to USB wireless LAN port on the projector)  
Dimensions  
Width:1.1"/28 mm  
Height:0.43"/11 mm  
Length:3.03"/77 mm  
0.042 lbs/19 g  
Weight  
Environmental Considerations Operational Temperatures :  
41° to 104°F / 5° to 40°C, 20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)  
Storage Temperatures :  
14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C), 20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)  
ꢀ49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Appendix  
Operation of the USB Wireless LAN Unit is subjected to the regulations of the countries listed below, and may be  
prohibited to use outside the country where you purchased. If you need to use the projector outside the country  
where you purchased, you must remove the USB Wireless LAN Unit from the projector bofore exporting.  
Product  
Supported countries and areas  
Name  
NP01LM2  
Austria / Belgium / Bulgaria / Cyprus / Czech / Denmark / Estonia /  
Finland / France / Germany / Greece / Hungary / Iceland / Ireland /  
Italy / Latvia / Liechtenstein / Lithuania / Luxembourg / Malta /  
Norway / Poland / Portugal / Romania / Slovak / Slovenia / Spain /  
Sweden / Switzerland / The Netherlands / United Kingdom  
NP01LM3  
Canada / Mexico / United States  
M Certificate marks and codes of the NP01LM Series (English)  
M Zertifizierungen und Codes der NP01LM-Serien (German)  
M Certifications et codes des séries NP01LM (French)  
M Marchi certificati e codici della Serie NP01LM (Italian)  
M Marcas y códigos certificados de la serie NP01LM (Spanish)  
M Marcas e códigos certificados da Série NP01LM (Portuguese)  
M Certifierade märken och koder för NP01LM serie (Swedish)  
Обозначения сертификатов и коды серии NP01LM (���  
M
M
NP01LM 시리즈의 인증서 표시 및 코드  
Korean  
( )  
NP01LM2  
NP01LM3 Mexico CFT ID: RCPNENP07-1083  
Finnish  
NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. vakuuttaa täten että USB Wireless  
LAN Unit (Model: NP01LM) tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY  
oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen  
mukainen.  
Portuguese NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. declara que este USB Wireless Unit  
(Model: NP01LM) está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e  
outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.  
Dutch  
Hierbij verklaart NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. dat het toestel USB  
Wireless LAN Unit (Model: NP01LM) in overeenstemming is met  
de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn  
1999/5/EG.  
Bij deze verklaart NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. dat deze USB  
Wireless LAN Unit (Model: NP01LM) voldoet aan de essentiële  
eisen en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/  
EC.  
Danish  
Greek  
Undertegnede NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. erklærer herved,  
at følgende udstyr USB Wireless LAN Unit (Model: NP01LM)  
overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv  
1999/5/EF.  
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡOΥΣΑ NEC Dply Solto, Ltd. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ OΤΙ USB Wrele��  
LAN Ut (Model: NP01LMΣΥΜΜOΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡOΣ ΤΙΣ OΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ  
ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛOΙΠΕΣ ΣXΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ OΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/  
ΕΚ.  
ꢀ50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Appendix  
Cabinet Dimensions  
U S B ( L A N )  
Y
A T N D . B O N / S E C R S O U  
T
O T . A  
U
D
A
J U S  
3 D . R E F O R M  
R
S
W O E P  
T U A T S  
L A M  
U S B  
P
S E L E C T  
M E N U  
P U  
N
W O D  
T
R I G H  
L E F T  
L E N S S H I F T  
399/15.7"  
Unit: mm/inch  
ꢀ5ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Appendix  
Screen Size and Projection Distance  
This section should be used when considering the distance to the screen and the screen size.  
[NP3250/NP2250/NP1250]  
Available projection distances are 1.0 m/41.2 inches for 30" screen to 18 m/718 inches for 500" screen, according  
to the chart.  
(Model)  
500  
400  
Wide  
300  
Screen size  
240  
(Diagonal)  
Tele  
200  
150  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
30  
(m)  
22  
8
14  
16  
18  
20  
6
10  
12  
2
4
Throw distance  
When tilted at an angle 10 in Wide  
(m)  
10  
Tele  
Wide  
8
6
4
2
Vertical distance between  
projector foot and screen  
top  
Screen center line (Wide)  
Screen center line (Tele)  
0
(m)  
22  
8
14  
16  
18  
20  
6
10  
12  
2
Projector foot  
4
Vertical lens shift : the highest position  
Using the Chart  
Example for 100" screen:  
The projection distance is approximately 3.1 m (122") according to the upper chart.  
The lower chart shows that the vertical distance between the projector foot and the screen top is approximately 1.5  
m (59"). The projection angle can be adjusted up to 10°. (The lower chart shows that the projector is placed in a  
horizontal position)  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Appendix  
[NP3250W]  
This section should be used when considering the distance to the screen and the screen size.  
Available projection distances are 1.1 m/43.5 inches for 30" screen to 19 m/756 inches for 500" screen, according  
to the chart.  
(Model)  
500  
400  
Wide  
300  
Screen size  
(Diagonal)  
240  
200  
Tele  
150  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
30  
(m)  
8
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
6
10  
12  
2
4
Throw distance  
When tilted at an angle 10 in Wide  
(m)  
10  
Tele  
8
6
4
2
Wide  
Vertical distance between  
projector foot and screen  
top  
Screen center line (Wide)  
Screen center line (Tele)  
0
(m)  
8
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
6
10  
12  
2
4
Projector foot  
Vertical lens shift : the highest position  
Using the Chart  
Example for 100" screen:  
The projection distance is approximately 3.3 m/130 inches according to the upper chart.  
The lower chart shows that the vertical distance between the projector foot and the screen top is approximately 1.4  
m/55 inches. The projection angle can be adjusted up to 10°. (The lower chart shows that the projector is placed in  
a horizontal position)  
ꢀ53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Appendix  
List of Screen Sizes  
[NP3250/NP2250/NP1250]  
List of Screen Sizes  
Width (H)  
Height (V)  
Screen size  
m
0.6  
0.8  
1.2  
1.6  
2.0  
2.4  
3.0  
4.1  
5.1  
6.1  
8.1  
10.2  
inch  
24.0  
m
0.46  
0.6  
0.9  
1.2  
1.5  
1.8  
2.3  
3.0  
3.8  
4.6  
6.1  
7.6  
inch  
18.0  
Height  
Screen size (Diagonal)  
Width  
30"  
40"  
60"  
80"  
100"  
120"  
150"  
200"  
250"  
300"  
400"  
500"  
31.5  
23.6  
47.2  
35.4  
63.0  
47.2  
78.7  
59.1  
94.5  
70.9  
118.1  
161.4  
200.8  
240.2  
318.9  
401.6  
90.6  
118.1  
149.6  
181.1  
240.2  
299.2  
Formulas: Screen width H (m)=Screen size x 4/5 x 0.0254  
Screen height V (m)=Screen size x 3/5 x 0.0254  
Screen width H (inch)=Screen size x 4/5  
Screen height V (inch)=Screen size x 3/5  
Screen Size and Projection Distance for Desktop when the standard lens is used  
The following drawing shows an example for use of Desktop.  
Horizontal projection position: Lens centered left to right  
Vertical projection position: See the table below.  
STANDARD  
Screen size  
(diagonal)  
Projection Distance (L)  
(H1)  
(inches)  
(m)  
(inches)  
Wide - Tele  
0.89 - 1.20  
1.20 - 1.62  
1.83 - 2.45  
2.05 - 2.75  
2.21 - 2.96  
2.46 - 3.29  
2.59 - 3.46  
2.78 - 3.71  
3.09 - 4.13  
3.72 - 4.96  
4.66 - 6.21  
5.60 - 7.47  
6.23 - 8.30  
6.54 - 8.72  
7.49 - 9.97  
7.80 - 10.39  
8.43 - 11.23  
9.37 - 12.48  
12.51 - 16.66  
15.65 - 20.83  
Wide - Tele  
35.1 - 47.3  
47.4 - 63.8  
72.2 - 96.6  
(cm)  
0-23  
0-30  
0-46  
0-51  
0-55  
0-61  
0-64  
0-69  
30"  
40"  
60"  
67"  
72"  
80"  
84"  
90"  
100"  
120"  
150"  
180"  
200"  
210"  
240"  
250"  
270"  
300"  
400"  
500"  
0-9.0  
0-12.0  
0-18.0  
0-20.1  
0-21.6  
0-24.0  
0-25.2  
0-27.0  
0-30.0  
0-36.0  
0-45.0  
0-54.0  
0-60.0  
0-63.0  
0-72.0  
0-75.0  
0-81.0  
0-90.0  
0-120.0  
0-150.0  
80.8 - 108.2  
87.0 - 116.4  
96.9 - 129.5  
101.8 - 136.1  
109.3 - 146.0  
121.6 - 162.4  
146.3 - 195.3  
183.4 - 244.6  
220.5 - 294.0  
245.3 - 326.9  
257.6 - 343.3  
294.7 - 392.6  
307.1 - 409.1  
331.8 - 442.0  
368.9 - 491.3  
492.5 - 655.8  
616.2 - 820.2  
0-76  
0-91  
0-114  
0-137  
0-152  
0-160  
0-183  
0-191  
0-206  
0-229  
0-305  
0-381  
H2 = Screen height (V) - H1  
Screen center  
Lens center  
H2  
H1  
88 mm/3.47"  
L
Projector foot  
Screen bottom  
NOTE: The values in the tables are design values and may vary.  
ꢀ54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Appendix  
List of Screen Sizes  
[NP3250W]  
List of Screen Sizes  
Screen size  
Width (H)  
Height (V)  
m
0.6  
0.7  
1.3  
1.7  
2.2  
2.6  
3.2  
4.3  
5.4  
6.5  
8.6  
10.8  
inch  
25.4  
m
inch  
15.9  
Height  
Screen size (Diagonal)  
30"  
40"  
0.4  
0.5  
0.8  
1.1  
1.3  
1.6  
2.0  
2.7  
3.4  
4.0  
5.4  
6.7  
33.9  
21.2  
60"  
50.9  
31.8  
80"  
67.8  
42.4  
100"  
120"  
150"  
200"  
250"  
300"  
400"  
500"  
84.8  
53.0  
101.8  
127.2  
169.6  
212.0  
254.4  
339.2  
424.0  
63.6  
Width  
79.5  
106.0  
132.5  
159.0  
212.0  
265.0  
Formulas: Screen width H (m)=Screen size x 4/5 x 0.0254  
Screen height V (m)=Screen size x 3/5 x 0.0254  
Screen width H (inch)=Screen size x 4/5  
Screen height V (inch)=Screen size x 3/5  
Screen Size and Projection Distance for Desktop when the standard lens is used  
The following drawing shows an example for use of Desktop.  
Horizontal projection position: Lens centered left to right  
Vertical projection position: See the table below.  
STANDARD  
Screen size  
(diagonal)  
Projection Distance (L)  
(H1)  
(inches)  
(m)  
(inches)  
Wide - Tele  
Wide - Tele  
0.94 - 1.27  
1.27 - 1.71  
1.93 - 2.58  
2.16 - 2.89  
2.33 - 3.11  
2.59 - 3.46  
2.72 - 3.64  
2.92 - 3.90  
3.25 - 4.34  
3.91 - 5.22  
4.90 - 6.54  
5.89 - 7.85  
6.55 - 8.73  
6.88 - 9.17  
7.87 - 10.49  
8.20 - 10.93  
8.87 - 11.81  
9.86 - 13.12  
13.16 - 17.52  
16.46 - 21.91  
(cm)  
30"  
40"  
60"  
67"  
72"  
80"  
84"  
90"  
100"  
120"  
150"  
180"  
200"  
210"  
240"  
250"  
270"  
300"  
400"  
500"  
37.0 - 49.8  
50.0 - 67.1  
0-20.2  
0-26.9  
0-40.4  
0-45.1  
0-48.5  
0-53.8  
0-56.5  
0-60.6  
0-67.3  
0-80.8  
0-101.0 0-39.7  
0-121.2 0-47.7  
0-134.6 0-53.0  
0-141.4 0-55.6  
0-161.5 0-63.6  
0-168.3 0-66.2  
0-181.7 0-71.5  
0-201.9 0-79.5  
0-269.2 0-106.0  
0-336.5 0-132.5  
0-7.9  
0-10.6  
0-15.9  
0-17.8  
0-19.1  
0-21.2  
0-22.3  
0-23.8  
0-26.5  
0-31.8  
76.0 - 101.7  
85.1 - 113.8  
91.6 - 122.5  
102.0 - 136.3  
107.2 - 143.2  
115.0 - 153.6  
128.0 - 170.9  
154.0 - 205.5  
193.0 - 257.4  
232.0 - 309.2  
258.0 - 343.8  
271.0 - 361.1  
310.0 - 413.0  
323.0 - 430.3  
349.0 - 464.9  
388.0 - 516.7  
518.0 - 689.6  
648.0 - 862.6  
H2 = Screen height (V) - H1  
Screen center  
Lens center  
H2  
H1  
88 mm/3.47"  
L
Projector foot  
Screen bottom  
NOTE: The values in the tables are design values and may vary.  
ꢀ55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Appendix  
Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER 1 Input Connector  
Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector  
Signal Level  
5
4
3
2
1
Video signal : 0.7Vp-p (Analog)  
Sync signal : TTL level  
10  
9
8
7
6
15 14 13 12 11  
Pin No.  
RGB Signal (Analog)  
YCbCr Signal  
1
2
Red  
Cr  
Y
Green or Sync on Green  
Blue  
3
Cb  
4
Ground  
5
Ground  
6
Red Ground  
Cr Ground  
Y Ground  
Cb Ground  
7
Green Ground  
Blue Ground  
8
9
No Connection  
Sync Signal Ground  
No Connection  
Bi-directional DATA (SDA)  
Horizontal Sync or Composite Sync  
Vertical Sync  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Data Clock  
ꢀ5ꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Appendix  
Compatible Input Signal List  
Resolution  
(Dots)  
Frequency H.  
Refresh Rate  
(Hz)  
Horizontal: 15 kHz to 108 kHz (RGB:  
24 kHz or over)  
Vertical: 48 Hz to 120 Hz  
Signal  
(kHz)  
15.73  
15.63  
31.47  
37.86  
37.50  
39.38  
43.27  
35.16  
37.88  
48.08  
46.88  
53.67  
48.36  
56.48  
60.02  
68.68  
54.35  
63.99  
67.50  
77.49  
49.70  
62.80  
71.55  
60.00  
75.00  
85.94  
63.98  
79.98  
91.15  
65.32  
55.94  
75.00  
81.25  
87.50  
93.75  
65.29  
35.00  
49.72  
60.24  
68.68  
69.87  
61.80  
71.74  
37.50  
45.00  
26.97  
28.13  
33.75  
31.47  
31.25  
15.73  
15.63  
31.47  
31.25  
VIDEO  
NTSC/PAL60  
PAL/SECAM  
*
*
59.94/60.00  
50.00  
59.94  
72.81  
75.00  
75.00  
85.01  
56.25  
60.32  
72.19  
75.00  
85.06  
60.00  
70.07  
75.03  
85.00  
60.05  
70.02  
75.00  
85.06  
59.81  
74.93  
84.88  
60.00  
75.00  
85.00  
60.02  
75.02  
85.02  
60.00  
59.89  
60.00  
65.00  
70.00  
75.00  
59.95  
66.67  
74.55  
74.93  
75.06  
65.18  
65.95  
76.05  
50.00  
60.00  
47.95  
50.00  
60.00  
59.94  
50.00  
59.94  
50.00  
59.94  
50.00  
IBM compatible  
640  
640  
640  
640  
640  
800  
800  
800  
800  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
480  
480  
480  
480  
480  
600  
600  
600  
600  
600  
768  
768  
768  
768  
864  
864  
864  
864  
800  
800  
800  
960  
960 *  
960 *  
1024  
1024 *  
1024 *  
1050  
900  
1200 *  
1200 *  
1200 *  
1200 *  
1050 *  
480  
800  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1152  
1152  
1152  
1152  
1280  
1280  
1280  
1280  
1280  
1280  
1280  
1280  
1280  
1400  
1440  
1600  
1600  
1600  
1600  
1680  
640  
Apple Macintosh®  
832  
624  
768  
870  
1024  
900  
900  
720  
720  
1080  
1080  
1080  
480  
1024  
1152  
1280  
1152  
1152  
1280  
1280  
1920  
1920  
1920  
720  
SUN  
SGI  
HDTV  
720p  
720p  
1080i  
1080i  
1080i  
480p  
576p  
YCbCr  
SDTV  
DVD  
720  
720  
720  
720  
576  
480 *  
576 *  
480  
Progressive  
720  
576  
NOTE:  
• An image with higher or lower resolution than the projector’s native resolution (NP3250/NP2250/NP1250: 1024 × 768,  
NP3250W: 1280 × 800) will be displayed with scaling technology.  
• Some composite sync signals may not be displayed correctly.  
Signals other than those specified in the table above may not be displayed correctly. If this should happen, change the refresh  
rate or resolution on your PC. Refer to Display Properties help section of your PC for procedures.  
• Images above flagged with “*” are not supported by digital signal.  
ꢀ5ꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Appendix  
PC Control Codes and Cable Connection  
PC Control Codes  
Function.  
Code.Data  
POWER.ON.  
POWER.OFF.  
02H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 02H  
02H. 01H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 03H  
INPUT.SELECT.COMPUTER.1. 02H. 03H. 00H. 00H. 02H. 01H. 01H. 09H  
INPUT.SELECT.COMPUTER.2. 02H. 03H. 00H. 00H. 02H. 01H. 02H. 0AH  
INPUT.SELECT.COMPUTER.3. 02H. 03H. 00H. 00H. 02H. 01H. 1AH. 22H  
INPUT.SELECT.COMPONENT.  
INPUT.SELECT.VIDEO.  
INPUT.SELECT.S-VIDEO.  
INPUT.SELECT.VIEWER.  
PICTURE.MUTE.ON.  
PICTURE.MUTE.OFF.  
SOUND.MUTE.ON.  
SOUND.MUTE.OFF.  
ON.SCREEN.MUTE.ON.  
ON.SCREEN.MUTE.OFF.  
ASPECT.RATIO.(4:3.Screen)  
4:3.  
02H. 03H. 00H. 00H. 02H. 01H. 10H. 18H  
02H. 03H. 00H. 00H. 02H. 01H. 06H. 0EH  
02H. 03H. 00H. 00H. 02H. 01H. 0BH. 13H  
02H. 03H. 00H. 00H. 02H. 01H. 1FH.  
02H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 12H  
02H. 11H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 13H  
02H. 12H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 14H  
02H. 13H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 15H  
02H. 14H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 16H  
02H. 15H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 17H  
27H  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 30H  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 01H. 00H. 31H  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 02H. 00H. 32H  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 03H. 00H. 33H  
LETTERBOX.  
WIDESCREEN.  
ZOOM.  
ASPECT.RATIO.(16:9.Screen)  
4:3.WINDOW.  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 30H  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 01H. 00H. 31H  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 02H. 00H. 32H  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 04H. 00H. 34H  
LETTERBOX.  
WIDESCREEN.  
4:3.FILL.  
ASPECT.RATIO.(RGB)  
4:3.  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 00H. 30H  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 02H. 00H. 32H  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 0BH. 00H. 3BH  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 0CH. 00H. 3CH  
03H. 10H. 00H. 00H. 05H. 18H. 00H. 00H. 0DH. 00H. 3DH  
16:9.  
5:4.  
16:10.  
15:9.  
AUTO.ADJUST.  
02H. 0FH.  
00H. 00H. 02H. 05H. 00H. 18H  
NOTE: Contact your local dealer for a full list of PC Control Codes if needed.  
ꢀ58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9. Appendix  
Cable Connection  
Communication Protocol  
Baud.rate............................................38400.bps  
Data.length........................................ 8.bits  
Parity................................................. No.parity  
Stop.bit............................................. One.bit  
X.on/off............................................. None  
Communications.procedure.............. Full.duplex  
NOTE: Depending on the equipment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs.  
PC Control Connector (D-SUB 9P)  
To TxD of PC  
To RxD of PC  
To GND of PC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To RTS of PC  
To CTS of PC  
NOTE 1: Pins 1, 4, 6 and 9 are no used.  
NOTE 2: Jumper “Request to Send” and “Clear to Send” together on both ends of the cable to simplify cable connection.  
NOTE 3: For long cable runs it is recommended to set communication speed within projector menus to 9600 bps.  
ꢀ59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9. Appendix  
Removing and Attaching the USB Wireless LAN Unit  
Important  
The USB Wireless LAN Unit consists of two modules: a Wireless LAN module (USB) and a joint module.  
Do not insert other USB devices into the USB Wireless LAN unit port.  
Do not insert the USB Wireless LAN unit into the USB port (Type A).  
The USB Wireless LAN Unit must be inserted into the USB Wireless LAN Unit port in the correct direction.  
It cannot be inserted in the reverse direction. If the USB Wireless LAN Unit is inserted in the reverse direction  
with excessive force applied, the USB port may break.  
Before touching the USB Wireless LAN Unit, touch a metallic object (such as a door knob or aluminum window  
frame) to discharge the static electricity from your body.  
Always insert or remove the USB Wireless LAN unit when the main power is turned off. Failure to do so may  
cause projector malfunction or damage to the USB wireless LAN unit. If the projector will not work correctly, turn  
off the projector, wait 30 seconds, and turn it back on.  
The blue LED on the Wireless LAN Unit flashes to show that Wireless LAN Unit is working.  
If the Wireless LAN Unit is attached incorrectly, the blue LED will not light.  
To remove and attach the optional USB Wireless LAN Unit to the USB Wireless LAN unit port, fol-  
low the instructions below.  
Removing the USB Wireless LAN Unit  
A Phillips-head screw driver is needed.  
1. Press POWER ON/STAND BY button to set the projector to Stand-by mode, then press the “O (off)” side  
of the main power switch of the projector.  
2. Loosen and remove two screws.  
L
L
E
E
F
N
S
T
S
H
IF  
T
R
IG  
H
T
DO  
W
N
U
P
SELEC  
T
3
D
R
E
F
O
R
M
A
U
T
O
A
D
J
U
S
T
S
O
U
R
C
E
O
N
/S  
T
A
N
U
SB  
D
B
L
A
Y
M
S
P
T
A
P
T
U
O
S
W
E
R
W
I
R
E
L
E
S
S
S
S
E
L
E
R
I
W
ꢀꢂ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9. Appendix  
3. Slowly remove the dummy case or the current attached USB Wireless LAN Unit.  
S
E
L
E
C
T
3
D
R
E
F
O
R
M
A
U
T
O
A
D
J
U
S
T
S
O
U
R
C
E
ON/STAN
U
S
B
L
A
M
S
P
T
A
T
P
U
S
O
W
E
R
WIRLES  
WIRLES  
Attaching the USB Wireless LAN Unit  
A Phillips-head screw driver is needed.  
1. Slowly remove the dummy case or the Wireless LAN module from the joint module. (if using the optional  
USB Wireless LAN Unit)  
WIRLES  
S
S
WIRLES  
2. Slowly insert the USB Wireless LAN module into the joint module. (if using the optional USB Wireless  
LAN Unit)  
WIRLES  
S
S
WIRLES  
3. Insert the USB Wireless LAN Unit slowly into the USB port on the rear panel of the projector.  
NOTE: After inserting, make sure the bottom of the USB Wireless LAN unit is firmly seated against the cabinet.  
S
E
L
E
C
T
3
D
R
E
F
O
R
M
A
U
T
O
A
D
J
U
S
T
S
O
U
R
C
E
ON/ST  
AND
U
S
B
L
A
M
S
P
T
A
T
P
U
S
O
W
E
R
WIRLES  
WIRLES  
ꢀꢂꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Appendix  
4. Tighten the two screws.  
L
L
E
E
F
N
S
T
S
H
IF  
T
R
IG  
H
T
DO  
W
N
U
P
SELEC  
T
3
D
R
E
F
O
R
M
A
U
T
O
A
D
JU  
S
T
S
O
U
R
C
E
O
N
/S  
T
A
N
U
SB  
D
B
L
A
Y
M
S
P
T
A
P
T
U
O
S
W
E
R
W
I
R
E
L
E
S
S
S
S
E
L
E
R
I
W
ꢀꢂꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Appendix  
Troubleshooting Check List  
9
Before contacting your dealer or service personnel, check the following list to be sure repairs are needed also by  
referring to the “Troubleshooting” section in your user’s manual. This checklist below will help us solve your problem  
more efficiently.  
* Print the following pages.  
Frequency of occurrence...always....sometimes.(How.often?_____________________).....other.(__________________)  
Power  
No.power.(POWER.indicator.does.not.light.green)...See.also.  
Shut.down.during.operation.  
“Status.Indicator.(STATUS)”.  
Power.cable’s.plug.is.fully.inserted.into.the.wall.outlet.  
Lamp.cover.is.installed.correctly.  
Auto.Power.Off.is.turned.off.(only.models.with.the.Auto.  
Power.Off.function).  
Power.cable’s.plug.is.fully.inserted.into.the.wall.outlet.  
Main.power.switch.is.pressed.to.the.ON.position.  
Lamp.cover.is.installed.correctly.  
Lamp.Hours.Used.(lamp.operation.hours).was.cleared.after.  
lamp.replacement.  
Off.Timer.is.turned.off.(only.models.with.the.Off.Timer.func-  
tion).  
No.power.even.though.you.press.and.hold.the.POWER.but-  
ton.for.a.minimum.of.2.seconds.  
PROGRAM.TIMER.is.turned.off.(only.models.with.the.Pro-  
gram.Timer.function).  
Video and Audio  
No.image.is.displayed.from.your.PC.or.video.equipment.to.the.  
Parts.of.the.image.are.lost.  
projector.  
Still.unchanged.even.though.you.press.the.AUTO.ADJUST.  
button.  
Still.unchanged.even.though.you.carry.out.[RESET].in.the.  
projector’s.menu.  
Still.no.image.even.though.you.connect.the.projector.to.the.  
PC.first,.then.start.the.PC.  
Enabling.your.notebook.PC’s.signal.output.to.the.projector.  
A combination of function keys will enable/disable the  
external display. Usually, the combination of the “Fn” key  
along with one of the 12 function keys turns the external  
display on or off.  
Image.is.shifted.in.the.vertical.or.horizontal.direction.  
Horizontal.and.vertical.positions.are.correctly.adjusted.on.a.  
computer.signal.  
Input.source’s.resolution.and.frequency.are.supported.by.the.  
projector.  
No.image.(blue.background,.logo,.no.display).  
Still.no.image.even.though.you.press.the.AUTO.ADJUST.but-  
ton.  
Still.no.image.even.though.you.carry.out.[RESET].in.the.pro-  
jector’s.menu.  
Signal.cable’s.plug.is.fully.inserted.into.the.input.connector  
A.message.appears.on.the.screen.  
(._____________________________________________.)  
The.source.connected.to.the.projector.is.active.and.available.  
Still.no.image.even.though.you.adjust.the.brightness.and/or.  
the.contrast.  
Input.source’s.resolution.and.frequency.are.supported.by.the.  
projector.  
Some.pixels.are.lost.  
Image.is.flickering.  
Still.unchanged.even.though.you.press.the.AUTO.ADJUST.  
button.  
Still.unchanged.even.though.you.carry.out.[RESET].in.the.  
projector’s.menu.  
Image.shows.flickering.or.color.drift.on.a.computer.signal.  
Still.unchanged.even.though.you.change.[FAN.MODE].from.  
[HIGH.ALTITUDE].to.[AUTO].  
Image.appears.blurry.or.out.of.focus.  
Still.unchanged.even.though.you.checked.the.signal’s.resolu-  
tion.on.PC.and.changed.it.to.projector’s.native.resolution.  
Still.unchanged.even.though.you.adjusted.the.focus.  
Image.is.too.dark.  
Remains.unchanged.even.though.you.adjust.the.brightness.  
and/or.the.contrast.  
No.sound.  
Audio.cable.is.correctly.connected.to.the.audio.input.of.the.  
Image.is.distorted.  
projector.  
Image.appears.to.be.trapezoidal.(unchanged.even.though.  
you.carry.out.the.[KEYSTONE].or.[3D.REFORM].adjustment).  
Still.unchanged.even.though.you.adjusted.the.volume.level.  
AUDIO.OUT.is.connected.to.your.audio.equipment.(only.  
models.with.the.AUDIO.OUT.connector).  
Other  
Remote.control.does.not.work.  
Buttons.on.the.projector.cabinet.do.not.work.(.only.models.with.  
the.Control.Panel.Lock.function).  
No.obstacles.between.the.sensor.of.the.projector.and.the.  
remote.control.  
Control.Panel.Lock.is.not.turned.on.or.is.disabled.in.the.menu.  
Projector.is.placed.near.a.uorescent.light.that.can.disturb.  
the.infrared.remote.controls.  
Still.unchanged.even.though.you.press.and.hold.the.EXIT.  
button.for.a.minimum.of.10.seconds.  
Batteries.are.new.and.are.not.reversed.in.installation..  
If.present.on.the.remote.control,.projector.selector.switch.is.  
not.used.  
ꢀꢂ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Appendix  
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.  
Information on application and environment where your projector is used  
Projector  
Installation environment  
Screen.size:.  
Screen.type:. .White.matte....Beads...Polarization  
.Wide.angle....High.contrast  
Throw.distance:. feet/inch/m  
Model.number:  
.
.
inch  
Serial.No.:  
Date.of.purchase:  
Lamp.operating.time.(hours):  
Lamp.Mode:.  
.
.
.Normal...Eco  
Orientation:. .Ceiling.mount....Desktop  
Power.outlet.connection:  
Information.on.input.signal:  
Horizontal.synch.frequency. [..........].kHz  
.Connected.directly.to.wall.outlet  
Vertical.synch.frequency.  
[..........].Hz  
.Connected.to.power.cord.extender.or.other.(the.  
number.of.connected.equipment______________)  
Synch.polarity.  
H..(+)...(−)  
.Connected.to.a.power.cord.reel.or.other.(the.num-  
.
V..(+)...(−)  
ber.of.connected.equipment______________)  
Synch.type.  
.Separate...Composite  
.Sync.on.Green  
.
Computer  
STATUS.Indicator:  
Steady.light.  
Manufacturer:  
.Orange...Green  
Model.number:  
Notebook.PC../.Desktop.  
Native.resolution:  
Refresh.rate:  
Flashing.light.  
[..........].cycles  
Remote.control.model.number:  
Video.adapter:  
Other:  
Projector  
PC  
DVD player  
Video equipment  
Signal cable  
VCR,.DVD.player,.Video.camera,.Video.game.or.other  
NEC.standard.or.other.manufacturer’s.cable?  
Model.number:........................Length:..............inch/m  
Manufacturer:  
Model.number:  
Distribution.amplifier  
Model.number:  
Switcher  
Model.number:  
Adapter  
Model.number:  
ꢀꢂ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Appendix  
5) Problems or damage caused by use in hot or humid places, in  
vehicles, boats or ships, etc.  
TravelCare Guide  
6) Problems or damage caused by expendable supplies or de-  
vices connected to the product other than those designated by  
NEC.  
TravelCare - a service for international travelers  
This product is eligible for “TravelCare”, NEC’s unique international  
warranty.  
7) Problems caused by natural consumption, wear or deteriora-  
tion of parts under normal usage conditions.  
Please note that TravelCare coverage differs in part from coverage  
under the warranty included with the product.  
8) Problems or damage to lamps and other expendable supplies,  
included parts or optional parts.  
Services offered with TravelCare  
This warranty allows customers to receive service on their product at  
the NEC and NEC-designated service stations in the countries listed  
herein when temporarily traveling internationally for business or plea-  
sure.  
For details on services offered by the different service stations, please  
refer to the “List of TravelCare Outlets” below.  
9) Other conditions stipulated in the warranty included with the  
product also apply.  
NOTE: The product can be used overseas with voltages indicated in the rat-  
ing label on the product by using a power cable suited for the standards and  
power source voltage of the country in which the product is being used.  
ꢀ Repair services  
The product will be repaired and delivered within 10 business days,  
not including shipping time.  
During the term of warranty, the cost of maintenance parts, labor  
costs for repairs and shipping costs within the service station’s cov-  
erage area are covered by the warranty.  
List of TravelCare Outlets  
This list applies as of July 1, 2008.  
For the most up-to-date information, please refer to the websites of  
the service stations in the various countries on the List of TravelCare  
Outlets or to the NEC website at http://www.nec-display.com/global/in-  
ꢁ Replacement product rental service  
If the customer desires, he or she can rent a replacement product  
while the original product is being repaired.  
Fee: US$200 for 12 days  
This fee must be paid at the local service station in cash or credit  
card.  
The US$200 rental fee is non-refundable even if the customer rents  
it less than 12 days before returning.  
In Europe  
NEC Europe Ltd. / European Technical Centre  
Address:  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
Email Address: [email protected]  
WEB Address:  
Unit G, Stafford Park 12, Telford TF3 3BJ, U.K.  
+44 1952 237000  
+44 1952 237006  
The replacement product will be delivered within 3 business days.  
If the customer did not return the replacement product within 12  
days, the customer will be charged the price of the unit.  
If the customer returned the replacement product in a faulty or  
damaged condition, the repair cost will be charged to the customer.  
Note that this service is not offered in all countries and regions.  
Please refer to the “List of TravelCare Outlets”.  
(Regions Covered)  
EU:  
Austria*, Belgium*, Bulgaria*, Czech Republic*, Cyprus*,  
Denmark*, Estonia*, Finland*, France*, Germany*,  
Greece*, Hungary*, Ireland*, Italy*, Latvia*, Lithuania*,  
Luxembourg*, Malta*, The Netherlands*, Poland*, Portu-  
gal*, Romania*, Slovakia*, Slovenia*, Spain*, Sweden*  
and the United Kingdom*  
In addition, this replacement product rental service is not offered  
after the product’s warranty has expired.  
EEA: Norway*, Iceland and Liechtenstein  
Term of warranty  
In North America  
NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc.  
1
Address:  
500 Park Boulevard, Suite 1100 Itasca, Illinois  
60143, U.S.A.  
+1 800 836 0655  
+1 800 356 2415  
a. Upon presentation of the warranty or receipt received upon  
purchase:  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
Valid for the term indicated on the warranty or the normal term  
of warranty for the country of purchase.  
Email Address: vsd.tech-support@necdisplay.com  
WEB Address:  
b. When only the product is brought in:  
Valid for a period of within 14 months of the date of manufac-  
ture indicated by the serial number attached to the product.  
(Regions Covered)  
U.S.A. *, Canada*  
2 When a product whose term of warranty is expired is brought in:  
In Oceania  
NEC Australia Pty., Ltd.  
Address:  
Repairs will be offered for a fee. In this case the customer is not  
eligible for the replacement product rental service.  
3 In the following cases, repairs may be charged, even if the product’  
s warranty is still in effect:  
New South Wales;  
Sydney  
1) If the term of warranty, model name, serial number and name  
of the store of purchase are not indicated on the warranty or  
have been altered.  
184 Milperra Road, Reversby NSW 2212  
Telephone 131 632  
Newcastle  
120 Parry Street Newcastle West NSW 2302  
Telephone 131 632  
Victoria;  
Melbourne  
2) Problems or damage caused by dropping or shocks during  
shipment or movement by the customer or by improper han-  
dling by the customers.  
3) Problems or damage caused by improper usage or unwarrant-  
able alterations or repairs by the customer.  
Unit 1/6 Garden Road, Clayton VIC 3168  
Telephone 131 632  
4) Problems or damage caused by fire, salt damage, gas dam-  
age, earthquakes, lightning damage, storm or flood damage or  
other natural disasters or such external factors as dust, ciga-  
rette smoke, abnormal voltage, etc.  
Queensland;  
Brisbane  
Unit 4/305 Montague Road West End QLD 4101  
Telephone 131 632  
Southport  
Shop1 48 Ferry Road Southport QLD 4215  
Telephone 131 632  
ꢀꢂ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Appendix  
South Australia;  
Adelaide  
NEC Corporation of Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.  
Address:  
33rd Floor, Menara TA One, 22, Jalan P. Ram-  
lee, 50250 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia  
+6 03 2178 3600 (ISDN)  
84A Richmond Road, Keswick SA 5035  
Telephone 131 632  
Western Australia;  
Perth  
45 Sarich Court Osborne Park WA 6017  
Telephone 131 632  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
+6 03 2178 3789  
Email Address: [email protected]  
WEB Address:  
(Regions Covered)  
Malaysia  
WEB Address:  
(Regions Covered)  
Australia*, New Zealand  
Hyosung ITX Co., Ltd.  
Address:  
1st Fl., Ire B/D. #2, 4Ga, Yangpyeng-Dong,  
Youngdeungpo-Gu, Seoul, Korea 150-967  
+82 2 2163 4193  
In Asia and Middle East  
NEC Display Solutions, Ltd.  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
+82 2 2163 4196  
Address:  
686-1, Nishioi, Oi-Machi, Ashigarakami-Gun,  
Email Address: [email protected]  
Kanagawa 258-0017, Japan  
+81 465 85 2369  
+81 465 85 2393  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
(Regions Covered)  
South Korea  
Email Address: [email protected]  
WEB Address:  
Lenso Communication Co., Ltd.  
Address:  
292 Lenso House 4, 1st Floor, Srinakarin  
(Regions Covered)  
Japan*  
Road, Huamark, Bangkapi, Bangkok 10240,  
Thailand  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
+66 2 375 2425  
+66 2 375 2434  
NEC Solutions (China) Co.,Ltd.  
Address:  
Rm 1903, Shining Building, 35 Xueyuan Rd,  
Email Address: [email protected]  
Haidian District Beijing 100083, P.R.C.  
+8610 82317788  
+8610 82331722  
WEB Address:  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
(Regions Covered)  
Thailand  
Email Address: [email protected]  
WEB Address:  
ABBA Electronics L.L.C.  
Address:  
Tariq Bin Ziyad Road, P.O.Box 327, Dubai,  
(Regions Covered)  
China  
United Arab Emirates  
+971 4 371800  
+971 4 364283  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
NEC Hong Kong Ltd.  
Address:  
Email Address: [email protected]  
25/F.,The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis  
Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong  
+852 2369 0335  
(Regions Covered)  
United Arab Emirates  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
+852 2795 6618  
Email Address: [email protected]  
Samir Photographic Supplies  
Address:  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
P.O.Box 599, Jeddah 21421, Saudi Arabia  
+966 2 6828219  
+966 2 6830820  
WEB Address:  
(Regions Covered)  
Hong Kong  
Email Address: [email protected]  
Riyadh  
NEC Taiwan Ltd.  
Address:  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
P.O.Box 5519, Riyadh 11432, Saudi Arabia  
+966 1 4645064  
+966 1 4657912  
Address:  
7F, No.167, SEC.2, Nan King East Road,  
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
+886 2 8500 1700  
+886 2 8500 1420  
Email Address: [email protected]  
Email Address: [email protected]  
Alkhobar  
WEB Address:  
Address:  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
P.O.Box 238, Alkhobar 31952, Saudi Arabia  
+966 3 8942674  
+966 3 8948162  
(Regions Covered)  
Taiwan  
Email Address: [email protected]  
NEC Asia Pte.Ltd.  
(Regions Covered)  
Saudi Arabia  
Address:  
401 Commonwealth Drive, #07-02, Haw Par  
Technocentre, Singapore 149598  
+65 6 273 8333  
NOTE: In countries designated with an asterisk(*), replacement product rental  
service are offered.  
Telephone:  
Fax Line:  
+65 6 274 2226  
Email Address: [email protected]  
WEB Address:  
(Regions Covered)  
Singapore  
ꢀꢂꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Appendix  
P-1/  
,
Date:  
/
/
,
TO: NEC or NEC’s Authorized Service Station:  
FM:  
(Company & Name with signature)  
Dear Sir (s),  
I would like to apply your TravelCare Service Program based on attached registration and qualification sheet and agree with  
your following conditions, and also the Service fee will be charged to my credit card account, if I don’t return the Loan units  
within the specified period. I also confirm following information is correct. Regards.  
Application Sheet for TravelCare Service Program  
Country,  
product purchased :  
User’s Company Name :  
User’s Company Address :  
Phone No., Fax No. :  
User’s Name :  
User’s Address :  
Phone No., Fax No. :  
Local Contact office :  
Local Contact office Address :  
Phone No., Fax No. :  
User’s Model Name :  
Date of Purchase :  
Serial No. on cabinet :  
Problem of units per User :  
Required Service :  
(1) Repair and Return  
(1) Credit Card  
(2) Loan unit  
Requested period of Loan unit :  
Payment method :  
(2) Travelers Cheque  
(3) Cash  
In Case of Credit Card :  
Card No. w/Valid Date :  
ꢀꢂꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Appendix  
5. Loan Service Charges and Conditions:  
Upon acceptance of this NEC Projector, Customer agrees to assume  
liability for this loan unit.  
Condition of your TravelCare Service Program  
Enduser is requested to understand following condition of TravelCare  
Service Program and complete the necessary information on the ap-  
plication sheet.  
The current cost of use of this loan unit is $200.00 USD for 12 calen-  
dar days.  
ꢀ. Service Options:  
There are 3 types of “Service” available. Enduser has to understand  
following condition and is required to fill in the Application Sheet.  
If Customer does not return the unit within the 12 calendar days, Cus-  
tomer will be charged the next highest cost up to and including the full  
list price to Credit Cards, which price will be informed by NEC Autho-  
rized Service Stations. Please see the attached listing of contacts for  
each country to arrange for pickup of the loan unit.  
1) Repair and Return:  
The ’Faulty unit’ is sent or collected from the customer. It is re-  
paired and returned within 10 days to the customer, excluding  
transport time.  
If you return to their country of origin with the loan unit, you will be  
charged additional freight to return the unit to the loaning country.  
There may have a case, repair and return can’t be done by NEC  
Authorized Service Station, because of shortage of spare parts due  
to same model is not sold in the territory.  
Thank you for your understanding of this program.  
2) Repair and Return with Loan: (This service is limited to some Ser-  
vice Stations)  
This service is offered to the Enduser, who cannot wait until their  
unit is repaired.  
The customer can borrow a unit for $200 up to 12 days. Customer  
then sends in inoperable unit to nearest NEC Authorized Service  
Station for service. In order to prevent collection problem, Enduser  
is required to fill in Application Sheet.  
Enduser needs to confirm the availability of the Service to NEC Au-  
thorized Service Stations.  
3) Loan Only:  
For this service, NEC Authorized Service Station supplies the cus-  
tomer with a loan unit for US$200 up to 12 days. Customer keeps  
the inoperable unit and when customer returns home, customer  
arranges to have the projector serviced in the home country.  
ꢁ. Warranty Exclusions:  
This program does not apply if the Projector’s serial number has been  
defaced, modified or removed.  
If, in the judgement of NEC Authorized Service Station or its agent the  
defects or failures result from any cause other than fair wear and tear  
or NEC neglect, or fault including the following without limitation:  
1) Accidents, transportation, neglect, misuse, abuse, water, dust,  
smoke or default of or by the Customer its employees or agents or  
any third party;  
2) Failure or fluctuation of electrical power, electrical circuitry, air con-  
ditioning, humidity control or other environmental conditions such  
as use it in smoking area;  
3) Any fault in the attachments or associated products or components  
(whether or not supplied by NEC or its agents which do not form  
part of the Product covered by this warranty);  
4) Any act of God, fire, flood, war, act of violence or any similar occur-  
rence;  
5) Any attempt by any person other than any person authorized by  
NEC to adjust, modify, repair, install or service the product.  
6) Any Cross-border charges such as, duty, insurance, tax etc.  
3. Charges for Warranty Exclusions and Out of Warranty Case:  
In case faulty unit is under warranty exclusions case or under Out of  
Warranty period, NEC Authorized Service Station will Inform estima-  
tion of actual service cost to the Enduser with reason.  
4. Dead on Arrival (DOA):  
Enduser must take this issue up with their original supplier in the  
country of purchase.  
NEC Authorized Service Station will repair the DOA unit as a War-  
ranty repair, but will not exchange DOA unit with new units.  
ꢀꢂ8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. 2009  
7N951321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Cooktop H370 2 User Manual
Miller Electric Welder XR A User Manual
Multiquip Drums MT 85H User Manual
Murphy Network Card SM1 User Manual
NDC comm Network Router NWH9250 User Manual
NEC Intercom System NP03Wi User Manual
New Balance Home Gym 5K 5100 User Manual
Nilfisk Advance America Vacuum Cleaner IVB 3 M User Manual
NordicTrack Home Gym NTEL75062 User Manual
Panasonic Digital Camera DMC FX75 User Manual